IntraUserManualm9030-9040V40e 02 (8566216E 01) [PDF]

Zitiervorschau

NetProcessor 9030 NetProcessor 9030/40 Multiplexer & SpliceRater Multiplexer

NETPROCESSOR 9030/40

SPLICERATER MULTIPLEXER

NETPROCESSOR 9030

MPEG MULTIPLEXER

User Manual Release 4.0

8566216E01 September 2010

www.thomson-networks.com

*8566216E*

ITALIANO LEGGERE QUESTO AVVISO PER PRIMO! Se non si capisce il contenuto del presente manuale NON UTILIZZARE L’APPARECCHIATURA. È anche disponibile la versione italiana di questo manuale, ma il costo è a carico dell’utente. SVENSKA LÄS DETTA FÖRST! Om Ni inte förstår informationen i denna handbok ARBETA DÅ INTE MED DENNA UTRUSTNING. En översättning till detta språk av denna handbok kan också anskaffas, på Er bekostnad. NEDERLANDS LEES DIT EERST! Als u de inhoud van deze handleiding niet begrijpt STEL DEZE APPARATUUR DAN NIET IN WERKING. U kunt tevens, op eigen kosten, een vertaling van deze handleiding krijgen. PORTUGUÊS LEIA O TEXTO ABAIXO ANTES DE MAIS NADA! Se não compreende o texto deste manual NÃO UTILIZE O EQUIPAMENTO. O utilizador poderá também obter uma tradução do manual para o português à própria custa. SUOMI LUE ENNEN KÄYTTÖÄ! Jos et ymmärrä käsikirjan sisältöä ÄLÄ KÄYTÄ LAITETTA. Käsikirja voidaan myös suomentaa asiakkaan kustannuksella. FRANÇAIS AVANT TOUT, LISEZ CE QUI SUIT! Si vous ne comprenez pas les instructions contenues dans ce manuel NE FAITES PAS FONCTIONNER CET APPAREIL. En outre, nous pouvons vous proposer, à vos frais, une version française de ce manuel. DANSK LÆS DETTE FØRST! Udstyret må ikke betjenes MEDMINDRE DE TIL FULDE FORSTÅR INDHOLDET AF DENNE HÅNDBOG. Vi kan også for Deres regning levere en dansk oversættelse af denne håndbog. DEUTSCH LESEN SIE ZUERST DIESEN HINWEIS! Sollte Ihnen der Inhalf dieses Handbuches nicht klar verständlich sein, dann BEDIENEN SIE DIESE GERÄTE NICHT! Eine Übersetzung des Handbuches in diese Sprache ist gegen Berechnung lieferbar. ESPAÑOL LEA ESTE AVISO PRIMERO! Si no entiende el contenido de este manual NO OPERE ESTE EQUIPO. Podemos asimismo suministrarle una traducción de este manual al (idioma) previo pago de una cantidad adicional que deberá abonar usted mismo.

Contacting Thomson Video Networks Contacting Thomson Video Networks: http://www.thomson-networks.com/

Thomson Video Networks reserves the right to make changes at any time without prior notice in order to improve design and supply the best possible product.

Manual Conventions The following symbol conventions are used in this manual: This symbol is intended to alert the User to the presence of a potential for property damage, personal injury or death.

This symbol identifies conditions or pratices that could result in damage to this device or other property.

This symbol indicates supplemental information that helps you make better use of the device.

This symbol indicates important information that helps you make better use of the device.

This symbol indicates the following information will help you solve a problem.

Naming conventions for the interface elements and Windows elements in this manual follow the Microsoft Manual of Style, Third Edition. In addition, the following formatting conventions apply to this manual: • Bold Italic text refers to any element of the Graphical User Interface that you are instructed to select, click, or localize. Example: Select Settings from the Configuration menu. • {Bold} text between brackets {} refers to any XMS application or specific software. Example: The XMS {Network Operation} application provides graphic views of the managed system. • Italic text refers to document names or sections. It is used in cross-references. Example: See “Activating XMS licences”, page 125 for further information. • Mono-spaced text can indicate the following: • Text you enter from a keyboard. Example: Enter administrator for your login and administrator for your password. • Paths to components on your hard drive. Example: The {Client-server tool} software is at the following location: Start/Programs/XMS 3500/XMS Licensing & Tools

v

Purpose of this manual and what is new in release V4.0

Purpose of this manual This User Manual applies to NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 release 4.0.

This manual contains the following chapters: Chapter 1 - SPECIFICATIONS provides technical specifications and detailed characteristics of the NetProcessor device.

Chapter 2 - INSTALLATION and START UP explains the operations required on initial start up: equipment installation, connection, power up and set-up.

Chapter 3 - OPERATION WITH WEB BROWSER describes the functions provided by the NetProcessor Web Graphical User Interface.

Chapter 4 - SERVICING maintenance information.

gives

useful

basic

preventive

and

corrective

Chapter 5 - TOOLS describes the SigEditor tool which is a signalling table editor used to edit all SI/PSI tables and the NetProcessor Equipment Setup which is used to download new product packages to one or more NetProcessor equipment items and update options.

Chapter 6 - ALARMS provides the list of alarms managed by NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

vi

Purpose of this manual and what is new in release V4.0

What’s new in NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 release 4.0

Some of the following features can be limited by software option settings.

The key features of release 4.0 are: 1. 9030 to 9040 upgradability: In order to keep an entry-level product providing remultiplexing features at very competitive price, the NetProcessor 9030 with single Power Supply remains unchanged. It cannot be upgraded to support the video processing features of NetProcessor 9040.

Conversely, the new NetProcessor 9030/40 ordered from version 4.0 with dual Power Supplies can be upgraded by adding 1 or 2 NetRater boards. This board installation can be done during manufacturing or later, on site through the Customer Service, when the customer feels the need to add video processing capabilities to his/her platform.

• N903BxyzAB

8 bundles UPGRADABLE !

N9030/40 option

On site upgrade

•x = A : Dual AC PS •x = D : First PS is DC (Second PS is AC or DC)

•z = 0 : No GigE port •z = G : Two GigE ports •y = 0 : No Scrambling •y = S : Scrambling

• N903BxyzAA are not upgradable • N903BxyzAA compatible with =V4.0

Previous models of NetProcessor 9030 (N903BxyzAA delivered prior to version 4.0) cannot be upgraded to 9040. This does not prevent them from being updated to version 4.0 to get the new software features offered by this release. NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Purpose of this manual and what is new in release V4.0

vii

2. New Hardware option: 10 I/O GX board

This board provides • 10 ASI In/Out ports which can be configured either as ASI Inputs or ASI Outputs. The number of ASI inputs / ASI outputs can be programmed via a CLI interface (sasiin command). All output ports are grouped on the right hand side of the strip; • a GPS interface to receive the GPS signals required for SFN adaptation; • a HD15 sub-D connector which provides 3 alarm relay closure GPO used for remote NetProcessor alarm management and 3 opto-coupled GPI used to trigger some actions like service switching. 3. Service redundancy and Service substitution From version 4.0, NetProcessor offers three different ways to switch over between services. These 3 modes are illustrated in the figure below:

Service splicing

Service splicing is not a new feature in version 4.0. It has been available with NetProcessor 9040 from its first version. Nevertheless, it is described in the current section in order to clarify the positioning of this feature in comparison with the two other new features: Service redundancy and Service substitution. Service splicing is a switch performed at the video and audio level (elementary streams) and the main benefit of this feature is the ability to switch seamlessly. A

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

viii

Purpose of this manual and what is new in release V4.0

good splice shall not even be noticeable by the receiver. As a consequence, splicing consists in switching from one program to another with the constraint of preserving the stream continuity during the program insertion: linear PCR and PTS, same PID and SI/PSI tables, management of the video/audio transition and T-STD buffer occupancy. The immediate consequence of this specification is that the primary and secondary programs must have the same characteristics: compression standard, resolution, number of audio components, etc. In addition, the components to be spliced cannot be scrambled. NetProcessor cannot perform Splicing without the video processing board (NetRater). Of course, this feature has a cost and besides the price of the hardware (NetRater board) and related options (Splicing options), it is important to note that splicing increases the signal latency by several seconds and it requires the spliced programs to meet some video and audio processing constraints. Use cases: Splicing is a very good solution whenever a program has to be switched frequently. A typical example is Ad Insertion which can occur several times an hour and requires an imperceptible and accurate video transition. Service substitution

In a way, service substitution can be seen as an alternative to splicing. Instead of processing the video and audio elementary streams, the service substitution relies on a PMT table change which actually brings about a kind of channel zapping in the receiver. Unlike splicing, the service substitution results in video and audio PID modifications which are signaled in a new PMT version. Only the service ID and the PMT PID are kept unchanged. As the receiver will have to restart on the new A/V PIDs, the program transition is handled by the receiver itself and the result might be different from one brand to another (more or less black or frozen pictures at the transition, audio fading, etc.). The strong advantage of service substitution is that it allows switching between programs that are completely different: for instance, from MPEG-2 to MPEG-4, from SD to HD, or from scrambled to unscrambled. Another interest is that the two programs (primary and secondary) are taken at the output of the Multiplexer (they can be "on air", "suspended" or "off air"); therefore, it is possible to build the two programs as required (component attachment, PID remapping, channel name, PMT descriptors, scrambling parameters, etc.) prior to the switch. The evident benefit of this solution is that it does not require the video processing hardware (NetRater board) and it can be performed on a simple NetProcessor 9030. Another advantage is the latency which can remain very low (50 msec) when the other services do not require transrating or splicing. The service substitution can be triggered via SCTE-35 (In-band cue-tone), GPI, or SNMP commands. NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Purpose of this manual and what is new in release V4.0

ix

Use Cases: As the transition is not seamless, the service substitution is not really suitable for ad insertion. Nevertheless, the transition is visible yet clean, and this feature will be good enough for regional program switchover or "time-shared" services that are not switched as frequently as ad insertion. In conclusion, service substitution is more flexible and less expensive than splicing and it can provide a good alternative to splicing when the transition does not have to be perfectly seamless. Service redundancy

Service redundancy allows to define a "back-up" service for any input service which is multiplexed in the NetProcessor. The switch from the nominal to the back-up service is triggered on stream error (no stream received, PMT or PAT absence) or whenever a "surveyed" component disappears or falls below a given bitrate. Additionally, it is possible to control the switch through a GPI or SNMP command. Switching back to the nominal can be done automatically after a "holdover" period, or from SNMP or GPI. Unlike splicing, service redundancy does not attempt to make a clean transition. The services are switched regardless of the picture type and GOP boundaries. The nominal and back-up services shall have the following properties: • Nominal and backup services may come from the same or different interfaces (any type); • A single back-up service can be used with several nominal services; • A back-up service cannot have a back-up; • A back-up service can be used as nominal (with no back-up) in a Multiplexer output; • Component PID matching between nominal service and backup service must be explicitly configured. Some components in the nominal service can be defined as "permanent" (no redundancy). Use cases: "Service redundancy" is not intended to replace the "ASI channel redundancy" managed by XMS/XMU. Actually, the "Service redundancy" feature of NetProcessor should be particularly useful in the following situations: • No XMS/XMU is used to control the NetProcessor; • Some incoming sources on NetProcessor are not managed by XMS/XMU (IRD, 3rd party encoder, etc.) 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

x

Purpose of this manual and what is new in release V4.0

• Some incoming sources on NetProcessor are not redunded (For instance, on IRD failure, NetProcessor can replace the faulty service with a "Slate" service delivered by a MPEG server). 4. ECM Monitoring and Filtering NetProcessor can handle up to 1000 ECM (crossing and generated). From version 4.0, each ECM present at the input and output of NetProcessor, with its associated PID bitrate, is monitored from the GUI:

In addition, it is possible for each output TS to configure the CAS to be kept according to a list of CAS_ID:

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Purpose of this manual and what is new in release V4.0

xi

For the discarded CAS which are not in the list: • Related CA_descriptors are removed from PMT and CAT; • Related CA_identifier are removed/cleaned from SDT and EIT (for descriptors referencing multiple CAS_ID, only the unfiltered CAS are kept); • ECM components and EMM services are stopped since related CAS_IDs are stopped. A last improvement related to ECM management is the possibility to clean incoming streams descrambled externally for each input TS. A command has been implemented in the GUI for that purpose (note that the exmfil CLI command present in the previous releases has been kept to clean incoming streams descrambled externally for all inputs at once).

5. Controlled NIT version number In NetProcessor, the NIT Actual can be downloaded. From version 4.0, it is possible to control the value of "version_number" associated to this table. This feature is sometimes useful for DTTV deployment in specific countries. 6. DVB-CI descrambling The DVB-S/DVB-S2 Front-End is an optional module that fits the left slot of NetProcessor 9030/40. This Front-End provides 2 RF Inputs that accept DVB-S or DVB-S2 signals.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

xii

Purpose of this manual and what is new in release V4.0

2 DVS/S2 2 DVS/S2 RF RFInIn

2 ASI 2 ASI out out

Optional I/O Modules

Optional ASI Modules

1 * DVB-CI CAM 1 * DVB-CI CAM Slot Slot

Each demodulated signal is routed internally to the NetProcessor and is also accessible over an ASI output on the module itself. In version 4.0 release, the PCMCIA slot will accept one DVB-CI module (CAM) in order to descramble a set of components in one transport stream. The following modules are supported: • ASTON PRO (BISS, Mediaguard, Viaccess, Conax); • SMARTDTV (Nagravision); • SMIT (Irdeto, Cryptoworks). Depending on the type of modules, the number of descrambled components can vary (usually 24 PIDs). Some modules have to be ordered directly by the end customer from the CAS provider (SMARTDTV/Nagravision and SMIT). 7. 64 RX streams over IP The number of RX streams have been increased from 50 to 64. 8. Number of output MPTS From version 4.0, up to 6 different output MPTS can be built per NetProcessor 9030/40. In the particular case when the same MPTS has to be delivered in two versions, clear and scrambled, then the maximum number of different streams that can be delivered per NetProcessor 9030/40 becomes 4 scrambled TS + the same 4 TS in the clear. 9. Byte Mode on ASI output From version 4.0, NetProcessor 9030/40 supports the packet mode and the data burst mode for ASI outputs in compliance with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB - PI). In packet mode, TS packets are presented as a burst of contiguous bytes. In data burst mode, TS packets are presented as individual bytes spread out in time.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Purpose of this manual and what is new in release V4.0

xiii

10. GUI improvements In version 4.0, the Graphical User Interface has been deeply redesigned, not only to support the new features, but also to make friendlier the configuration and monitoring of the device. Among the many improvements, the following ones give a partial idea of the result: • Splicing/Service redundancy/Substitution entirely configured by drag'n drop (no .xml file anymore); • Monitoring of ECM; • SI/PSI table content displayed in Monitoring view; • SI/PSI Table filters configurable by drag'n drop with multi-selection (several dozens of filters can be configured in one operation); • Direct access to Service Processing screen from the Top view; • Dedicated screen to configure the association between GPI states and actions (splice, redundancy, substitution). 11. System compatibility These enhancements and the software release 4.0 are compatible with the XMS/XMU management system release 4.32.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

xiv

Purpose of this manual and what is new in release V4.0

BLANK PAGE

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

General Safety Instructions

xv

General Safety Instructions

Please observe the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it. These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To avoid any risk of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the Operating Instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AC mains power cord

Mains cords are only shipped with devices if ordered. Otherwise, it is advisable to use mains cords as described in section Power supply and protective ground restrictions page 189.

DC power supply cord

Use the power supply cords shipped with the device. See section Power supply and protective ground restrictions page 189.

Avoid electric overload

Do not apply a mains voltage that is outside the range specified in this manual.

Reliable earthing

Ensure that your device is properly grounded before power-up. Grounding is through the power cord.

Mains power and circuit overloading

For each branch circuit, the connection panel should feature overload and earth fault protection and a bipolar cut-off device or a differential circuit breaker.

DC power and circuit overloading

8566216E(01) September 2010

The connection panel should feature protection against overload, which accepts 48V + 20% tensions and supports inrush current when the device is plugged in.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

xvi

General Safety Instructions

Mains power and DC power: Connection panel

The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the country of installation. Connection panel position in the rack must ensure that plugs and power cords are within easy reach for switching off purposes.

Rack Mount instructions

Elevated Operating Ambient: If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating air ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Provide proper ventilation as described in section Rack mounting page 180 to keep the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature (Tma = 45°C) specified by the manufacturer. Reduced Air Flow: Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised. Mechanical loading: Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading. Circuit Overloading: Considerations should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring. Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern. Reliable earthing: Reliable earthing of rackmounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g. use of power strips). Power disconnecting: Disconnect power before removing protective panel, soldering or replacing components (these operations can be performed by qualified service personnel only).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

General Safety Instructions

xvii

Rack Mount instructions

The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only. If you intend to install it in a rack, L-profiles are required and you must observe the ventilation and safety instructions described in section Rack mounting page 180.

Do not operate without covers

To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not operate this equipment with cover or blank panels removed.

Overload protection

Do not operate in explosive atmosphere Do not operate in wet/damp conditions Multiple Power Supply (Servicing)

Handling precautions

8566216E(01) September 2010

Power supply unit has integrated overload protection which cannot be accessed or reset. In the event of a malfunction, please contact the Thomson Video Networks Customer Services Department. To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in an explosive environment (atmosphere and materials). To avoid electric shock, this product should only be operated in dry conditions. The chassis may or does feature more than one power supply cords. To reduce the risk of electric shock, disconnect all power supply cords before servicing. To avoid injury while installing the device in a rack (or removing it from a rack), take all the necessary precautions. Ask another person for help or use an adapted carry lift.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

xviii

General Safety Instructions

Replacement of RAM with built-in lithium battery

The product includes non volatile RAM with builtin lithium batteries which should never require replacing. If for any reason replacement does prove necessary, please observe the following conditions: . The operation must only be performed by qualified personnel; . Only replace with the same or equivalent memory type. Caution: Danger of explosion if memory is incorrectly replaced; . Ensure the memory is inserted the right way round; . Please dispose of dead memories according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Class 1 Laser

The device may or does feature a board emitting class 1 invisible laser radiation. Caution: the use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedure other than those specified herein may result in hasardous radiation exposure. No standard applies to this device. Nevertheless, you are strongly recommended not to look directly at the optical connector when the device is switched on (or the end of the fibre connected to it). Laser characteristics: For SFP OSH: Class1, 1300 nm, AVAGO, HFCT5760TL, CDRH n°9521220-47 et TUV n°933/510116/02, maximum optical output power: 8dBm. For SFP OLH: Class1, 1300 nm, AVAGO, HFCT5760TL, CDRH n°9521220-46 et TUV n°933/510206/03, maximum optical output power: -8dBm. For 1000BASE-SX: Class1, 850 nm, maximum optical output power: 0dBm, AVAGO, AFBR5710LZ, CDRH 9720151-13, TUV e9971083.07, UL e173874. For 1000BASE-LX: Class1, 1300 nm, maximum optical output power: -3dBm, AVAGO, AFCT5710LZ, CDRH 9521220-52, TUV 933/510206/02, UL e173874.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

General Safety Instructions

Specific safety instructions for Finland, Norway and Sweden

xix

Finland: Laite on liitettävä suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Norway: Apparatet må tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Sweden: Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag.

PRODUCT DAMAGE PRECAUTIONS Fitting Dusty atmosphere

Observe the installation instructions in section Rack mounting page 180. As the device features no air filter, it must be mounted in a dust free environment. Refer to section Rack mounting page 180.

Provide proper ventilation

Provide proper ventilation to prevent product overheating. Refer to section Rack mounting page 180. All empty slots should be fitted with blank panels (mask plates) so as not to impair ventilation.

Do not operate with suspected failures

If you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.

Replacing components Retain original packaging

8566216E(01) September 2010

Only use components from or approved by Thomson Video Networks. If equipment is returned to the Customer Service Department, the faulty device must be packed where possible in its original packaging (protective corners and boxes). If you no longer have the packaging, the faulty device must be protected against shocks during transportation. The Customer Service Department examines packaging on arrival and can refuse to carry out repairs if the packaging has been visibly damaged during transportation and this has led to further damage in addition to the fault originally noted. Transportation costs and risks for equipment returns are borne by the customer. Equipment should only be returned with a Return Material Authorisation form.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

xx

General Safety Instructions

BLANK PAGE

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

xxi

Contents

Contents

Contacting Thomson Video Networks ..........................................................ii Manual Conventions ......................................................................................iii Purpose of this manual ..................................................................................v What’s new in NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 release 4.0 vi General Safety Instructions .........................................................................xv

CHAPTER 1 SPECIFICATIONS 1.1 - System overview ............................................................................................... 4 1.2 - Product Overview .............................................................................................. 9 1.2.1 - NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 common features ............. 9 1.2.2 - NetProcessor 9030 specific features......................................................... 10 1.2.3 - NetProcessor 9030/40 specific features.................................................... 10 1.3 - Ordering guide................................................................................................. 11 1.4 - Device description........................................................................................... 25 1.4.1 - Front panel ................................................................................................ 1.4.2 - Rear panel................................................................................................. 1.4.2.1 - Power outlet ................................................................................... 1.4.2.2 - Inputs/Outputs................................................................................ 1.4.3 - NetProcessor’s functional architecture ...................................................... 1.4.4 - ASI network interface ................................................................................ 1.4.4.1 - MPEG over ASI adaptation layer ................................................... 1.4.4.1.1 - ASI interface boards ........................................................ 1.4.4.1.2 - ASI Inputs ........................................................................ 1.4.4.1.3 - ASI Outputs...................................................................... 1.4.4.2 - MPEG over ASI rate capacity ........................................................ 1.4.5 - ATM network adaptation ........................................................................... 8566216E(01) September 2010

25 26 26 27 40 41 42 42 44 45 45 46

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

xxii

Contents

1.4.5.1 - MPEG over ATM Adaptation layer ................................................. 1.4.5.1.1 - Transmission .................................................................... 1.4.5.1.2 - Reception ......................................................................... 1.4.5.2 - Network interface features.............................................................. 1.4.5.2.1 - Multiplexing (ATM layer)................................................... 1.4.5.2.2 - Data links.......................................................................... 1.4.5.2.3 - Physical layer ................................................................... 1.4.5.3 - MPEG over ATM rate capacity ....................................................... 1.4.6 - IP network adaptation ................................................................................ 1.4.6.1 - MPEG over IP adaptation layer ...................................................... 1.4.6.1.1 - Transmission .................................................................... 1.4.6.1.2 - Reception ......................................................................... 1.4.6.2 - Network Interface ........................................................................... 1.4.6.2.1 - IP routing .......................................................................... 1.4.6.2.2 - MAC Layer and VLAN support ......................................... 1.4.6.2.3 - IP interface backup status ................................................ 1.4.6.2.4 - Gigabit Ethernet ports ...................................................... 1.4.6.3 - MPEG over IP rate capacity ........................................................... 1.4.6.4 - MPEG over IP overheads............................................................... 1.4.6.4.1 - Stacks and overheads...................................................... 1.4.6.4.2 - Calculating used bandwidth ............................................. 1.4.7 - DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End ....................................................................... 1.4.7.1 - Overview......................................................................................... 1.4.7.2 - Tuner/demodulator features ........................................................... 1.4.7.3 - DVB-CI descrambling ..................................................................... 1.4.7.3.1 - Overview .......................................................................... 1.4.7.3.2 - Signalling.......................................................................... 1.4.7.3.3 - Maximum bitrate and number of components .................. 1.4.8 - TS cross connecting .................................................................................. 1.4.8.1 - Inputs and Outputs ......................................................................... 1.4.8.2 - Connections.................................................................................... 1.4.8.3 - Output throughput........................................................................... 1.4.9 - Service processing..................................................................................... 1.4.9.1 - Incoming signalling, service and component management............ 1.4.9.1.1 - Definitions......................................................................... 1.4.9.1.2 - Incoming signalling management..................................... 1.4.9.1.3 - Service management .......................................................

47 47 48 49 49 52 58 60 61 62 62 69 71 71 71 72 72 73 73 73 75 76 76 77 78 78 79 79 80 80 81 81 83 85 85 87 88

1.4.9.1.3.1 - Overview ........................................................................88 1.4.9.1.3.2 - Locally built services ......................................................88 1.4.9.1.3.3 - Incoming & crossing services.........................................89 1.4.9.1.3.4 - service ID conflict ...........................................................90 1.4.9.1.3.5 - Service redundancy .......................................................91 1.4.9.1.3.6 - Service substitution ........................................................94

1.4.9.1.4 - Component management................................................. 97

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Contents

xxiii

1.4.9.1.4.1 - Overview........................................................................ 97 1.4.9.1.4.2 - Locally built components ............................................... 97 1.4.9.1.4.3 - Incoming and crossing components .............................. 98 1.4.9.1.4.4 - PID conflict management............................................... 99 1.4.9.1.4.5 - Ghost components......................................................... 99 1.4.9.1.4.6 - Shared components..................................................... 100 1.4.9.1.4.7 - Duplicated components ............................................... 100 1.4.9.1.4.8 - Added components...................................................... 100

1.4.9.1.5 - ECM management ......................................................... 101 1.4.9.1.5.1 - Locally built ECMs ....................................................... 101 1.4.9.1.5.2 - Incoming & crossing ECMs.......................................... 101

1.4.9.1.6 - EMM management......................................................... 101 1.4.9.1.6.1 - Locally built EMMs....................................................... 101 1.4.9.1.6.2 - Incoming & crossing EMMs ......................................... 101

1.4.9.1.7 - PCR management ......................................................... 1.4.9.2 - Multiplexing .................................................................................. 1.4.9.3 - Bitrate management with Automatic Component Filtering policy. 1.4.9.3.1 - Overview ........................................................................ 1.4.9.3.2 - Automatic Component Filtering policy ........................... 1.4.9.4 - Multiplexer overflow management ............................................... 1.4.9.5 - Output processing........................................................................ 1.4.9.5.1 - PCR and LTW information processing........................... 1.4.9.5.2 - Outgoing signalling management ..................................

102 103 104 104 104 106 107 107 107

1.4.9.5.2.1 - Overview...................................................................... 107 1.4.9.5.2.2 - PSI/SI table processing (MPEG/DVB standard) .......... 113 1.4.9.5.2.3 - PSI/PSIP table processing (ATSC standard)............... 120

1.4.9.6 - Scrambling ................................................................................... 1.4.9.6.1 - External SCS mode ....................................................... 1.4.9.6.2 - Internal SCS mode......................................................... 1.4.9.7 - SFN Adaptation............................................................................ 1.4.9.7.1 - Single Frequency Network and SFN Adapter overview. 1.4.9.7.2 - NetProcessor implementation........................................ 1.4.9.8 - Data Injection ............................................................................... 1.4.9.8.1 - Physical interfaces ......................................................... 1.4.9.8.2 - Supervision ....................................................................

126 126 128 130 130 131 132 132 132

1.4.9.8.2.1 - Protocols...................................................................... 133 1.4.9.8.2.2 - Multiplexing and Opportunistic Data mechanism......... 135

1.4.9.9 - Subtitle insertion .......................................................................... 1.4.10 - Video processing (available with NetProcessor 9030/40 model only) ............................................ 1.4.10.1 - Splicing ...................................................................................... 1.4.10.1.1 - Overview ...................................................................... 1.4.10.1.2 - Features....................................................................... 1.4.10.1.3 - Examples of application ...............................................

136 137 137 137 138 139

1.4.10.1.3.1 - Ad Insertion................................................................ 139

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

xxiv

Contents

1.4.10.1.3.2 - Live-to-Live splicing....................................................140

1.4.10.1.4 - Splicing features........................................................... 1.4.10.2 - Rate shaping .............................................................................. 1.4.10.2.1 - Overview ...................................................................... 1.4.10.2.2 - Features .......................................................................

141 146 146 146

1.4.10.2.2.1 - Main features .............................................................146 1.4.10.2.2.2 - CBR or VBR to CBR Rate shaping ("Capped VBR" or Clamping) ...................................................147 1.4.10.2.2.3 - CBR or VBR to VBR Rate Shaping with statistical multiplexing .......................................................148

1.4.11 - IP Flextream™ ....................................................................................... 1.4.11.1 - Overview..................................................................................... 1.4.11.2 - Typical IP Flextream topology .................................................... 1.4.11.3 - Specifications ............................................................................. 1.4.12 - Performances......................................................................................... 1.4.12.1 - Service processing ..................................................................... 1.4.12.2 - Scrambling..................................................................................

151 151 153 153 154 154 156

1.5 - Description of the Management systems .................................................... 157 1.5.1 - SNMP agent............................................................................................. 1.5.1.1 - Agent ............................................................................................ 1.5.1.1.1 - Protocol .......................................................................... 1.5.1.1.2 - Trap management .......................................................... 1.5.1.2 - MIB ............................................................................................... 1.5.2 - Web Interface........................................................................................... 1.5.3 - Command Line Interface (CLI)................................................................. 1.5.4 - XMS 3500 eXtensible Management System ...........................................

159 159 159 159 159 160 161 162

1.6 - Standard Compliance .................................................................................... 163 1.7 - General device Specifications ...................................................................... 165 1.7.1 - Electrical specifications............................................................................ 1.7.2 - Mechanical features................................................................................. 1.7.3 - Ventilation ................................................................................................ 1.7.4 - Environmental specifications ................................................................... 1.7.5 - Reliability..................................................................................................

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

165 168 170 171 172

8566216E(01) September 2010

Contents

xxv

1.8 - EU declaration of conformity ....................................................................... 173

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND

START UP

2.1 - NetProcessor mechanical features.............................................................. 177 2.2 - Installation procedure ................................................................................... 179 2.3 - Rack mounting............................................................................................... 180 2.3.1 - NetProcessor installation requirements................................................... 2.3.2 - Ventilation restrictions ............................................................................. 2.3.3 - Cabling restrictions .................................................................................. 2.3.4 - EMC ground restrictions.......................................................................... 2.3.5 - Power supply and protective ground restrictions..................................... 2.3.5.1 - Chassis models and their associated power supplies ................. 2.3.5.2 - Power supply cord(s) ................................................................... 2.3.5.2.1 - Cord(s) for AC mains power supply ............................... 2.3.5.2.2 - Cord(s) for DC power supply ......................................... 2.3.6 - Mechanical and Electrical Specifications ................................................ 2.3.6.1 - Mechanical specifications ............................................................ 2.3.6.2 - Electrical specifications ................................................................

180 181 187 187 189 189 190 190 191 192 192 194

2.4 - Power up ........................................................................................................ 197 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface................ 198 2.5.1 - Accessing the Command Line Interface.................................................. 198 2.5.2 - Login and password ................................................................................ 201 2.5.3 - Help ......................................................................................................... 202 2.5.4 - Setting initial parameters ......................................................................... 203 2.5.5 - Commands relating to IP parameters...................................................... 204 2.5.5.1 - Displaying IP parameters (ipdisp) ................................................ 204 2.5.5.2 - Editing IP parameters (ipset) ....................................................... 204 2.5.6 - Commands relating to the date and time ................................................ 206 2.5.6.1 - Displaying the current date and time (ddate) ............................... 206 2.5.6.2 - Changing the date and time (sdate)............................................. 206 2.5.7 - Commands related to the number of ASI inputs for ASI FLEX board.................................................................................................. 208 2.5.7.1 - Displaying the number of ASI inputs for ASI FLEX board (dasiin) 208 2.5.7.2 - Editing the number of ASI inputs for ASI FLEX board (sasiin)..... 209 2.5.8 - Commands related to the NetRater board(s) .......................................... 211 2.5.8.1 - Some words about NetRater board(s) preconfiguration for splicing and Rate shaping .................................................................................. 211 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

xxvi

Contents

2.5.8.2 - Editing NetRater board(s) preconfiguration for splicing and Rate shaping ........................................................................... 214 2.5.9 - Commands related to the splicing engines .............................................. 216 2.5.9.1 - Editing the default output values of the splicing engines.............. 216 2.5.9.2 - Editing the splicer policy in case of secondary channel failure while splicing............................................................................................ 218 2.5.10 - Commands related to the ATSC mode .................................................. 220 2.5.11 - Commands related to the DigiCypher streams ...................................... 222 2.5.11.1 - Displaying the DigiCypher mode ................................................ 222 2.5.11.2 - Editing the DigiCypher mode...................................................... 223 2.6 - Connecting the cables................................................................................... 224 2.6.1 - Connecting the cables to the main board ................................................ 2.6.2 - Connecting the cables to the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces........................ 2.6.3 - Connecting the cables to the ATM extension board ................................ 2.6.4 - Connecting the cables to the ASI extension board .................................. 2.6.5 - Connecting the cables to the GPO board ................................................ 2.6.6 - Connecting the cables to the DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End ......................

224 230 230 231 231 233

CHAPTER 3 OPERATION 3.1 - NetProcessor operation via a Web Browser ............................................... 240 3.1.1 - Foreword.................................................................................................. 3.1.2 - Purpose.................................................................................................... 3.1.3 - Setting up the link between the PC and the Web Interface ..................... 3.1.4 - Web Interface page breakdown ...............................................................

240 240 241 243

3.2 - Setup procedure steps .................................................................................. 245 3.2.1 - Step 1: Setting the interface static parameters ........................................ 247 3.2.2 - Step 2: Setting the dynamic Tx and Rx parameters ................................ 252 3.2.3 - Step 3: Setting the Multiplexer inputs ...................................................... 257 3.2.4 - Step 4: Creating and setting the Multiplexer output TS ........................... 261 3.2.5 - Step 5: Connecting the Multiplexer outputs to the physical interfaces (ASI, Gigabit Ethernet,...) ............................................................................................. 263 3.2.6 - Step 6: Setting the preprocessing............................................................ 265 3.2.7 - Step 7: Setting the service processing..................................................... 268 3.2.8 - Step 8: Setting the video processing ....................................................... 271 3.2.9 - Step 9: Setting the global settings ........................................................... 274 3.2.10 - Step 10: Setting the automation............................................................. 277 3.2.11 - Step 11: Injecting data ........................................................................... 279 3.2.12 - Step 12: Setting the In-Band Control & Command

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Contents

xxvii

over ATM and the Data service over ATM ......................................................... 282 3.3 - Installation menu ........................................................................................... 285 3.3.1 - LEDs........................................................................................................ 3.3.2 - Clicking on the panel charts .................................................................... 3.3.3 - Shortcut commands attached to the connectors ..................................... 3.3.4 - In-Band Control & Command over ATM setup menu .............................. 3.3.4.1 - Global settings sub-panel ............................................................ 3.3.4.2 - Links list sub-panel ...................................................................... 3.3.5 - Data service over ATM menus ................................................................ 3.3.5.1 - Extension port dialog box............................................................. 3.3.5.2 - Data service dialog box................................................................

286 287 289 305 306 306 308 309 309

3.4 - Configuration menu ...................................................................................... 311 3.4.1 - Top view and processing sub-menus...................................................... 3.4.1.1 - Top view sub-menu...................................................................... 3.4.1.2 - Processing sub-menu .................................................................. 3.4.1.2.1 - Sub-windows..................................................................

313 313 314 315

3.4.1.2.1.1 - Monitoring sub-window ................................................ 316 3.4.1.2.1.2 - Configuration sub-window ........................................... 321 3.4.1.2.1.3 - Alarm and Service replacement monitoring sub-window323

3.4.1.2.2 - Help, Save, Check and Apply buttons ........................... 325 3.4.1.2.2.1 - Help button .................................................................. 325 3.4.1.2.2.2 - Save, Check and Apply buttons................................... 326

3.4.1.3 - Setting the physical interface static configuration ........................ 327 3.4.1.3.1 - Interface setup menus ................................................... 327 3.4.1.3.2 - ASI setup dialog boxes .................................................. 328 3.4.1.3.2.1 - Overview...................................................................... 328 3.4.1.3.2.2 - ASI In setup dialog box................................................ 329 3.4.1.3.2.3 - ASI Out setup dialog box ............................................. 330

3.4.1.3.3 - RF In setup dialog boxes ............................................... 331 3.4.1.3.4 - ATM setup dialog boxes ................................................ 335 3.4.1.3.5 - IP setup dialog boxes..................................................... 338 3.4.1.3.6 - Data injection setup dialog boxes .................................. 343 3.4.1.3.7 - GPS PPS setup dialog box ............................................ 349 3.4.1.4 - Setting the Tx and Rx dynamic network communication parameters 350 3.4.1.4.1 - ATM Rx and ATM Tx setup menus................................ 351 3.4.1.4.1.1 - ATM Rx list and ATM Rx setup dialog box .................. 352 3.4.1.4.1.2 - ATM Tx list and ATM Tx setup dialog box ................... 354

3.4.1.4.2 - IP Rx and IP Tx setup menus ........................................ 356 3.4.1.4.2.1 - IP Rx list and IP Rx setup dialog box........................... 357 3.4.1.4.2.2 - IP Tx list and IP Tx setup dialog box ........................... 362

3.4.1.5 - Setting the Multiplexer input TS configuration ............................. 369 3.4.1.5.1 - Purpose.......................................................................... 369 3.4.1.5.2 - Creating Multiplexer input TS......................................... 371 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

xxviii

Contents

3.4.1.5.3 - Connecting the Multiplexer input TS to the physical interfaces (ASI In, ATM, Gigabit Ethernet, RF In) ............................................ 371 3.4.1.5.4 - Editing the Multiplexer input TS...................................... 372 3.4.1.6 - Creating the Multiplexer output TS ............................................... 377 3.4.1.6.1 - Purpose ......................................................................... 377 3.4.1.6.2 - Creating a Multiplexer output TS ................................... 377 3.4.1.6.3 - Removing a Multiplexer output TS ................................ 379 3.4.1.6.4 - Removing all Multiplexer output TS............................... 380 3.4.1.7 - Connecting the Multiplexer output TS to the physical interfaces (ASI Out, ATM, Gigabit Ethernet) ................................................................... 381 3.4.1.7.1 - Purpose ......................................................................... 381 3.4.1.7.2 - Creating a new output connection................................. 382 3.4.1.7.3 - Deleting an output connection....................................... 382 3.4.1.8 - Setting the preprocessing............................................................. 383 3.4.1.8.1 - Descrambling ................................................................. 383 3.4.1.8.2 - Service redundancy........................................................ 387 3.4.1.9 - Setting the service processing...................................................... 396 3.4.1.9.1 - Purpose ......................................................................... 396 3.4.1.9.2 - Overview of the Multiplexing page ................................ 397 3.4.1.9.2.1 - Items displayed in the Multiplexing left pane................397 3.4.1.9.2.2 - Display modes in the Multiplexing left pane .................399 3.4.1.9.2.3 - Nodes and shortcut commands in the Multiplexing panel401

3.4.1.9.3 - Output TS configuration ................................................ 409 3.4.1.9.4 - Signalling configuration ................................................. 412 3.4.1.9.5 - Table configuration........................................................ 415 3.4.1.9.5.1 - Basic methods to inject SI/PSI tables from an external carousel (typically SI/PSI generator) ........................................415 3.4.1.9.5.2 - Methods to supply SI/PSI tables to a NetProcessor internal carousel....................................................................................416

3.4.1.9.6 3.4.1.9.7 3.4.1.9.8 3.4.1.9.9

- Generated service configuration ................................... - Locally built or crossing Service Configuration.............. - Component configuration .............................................. - Building a multiplex: Use cases.....................................

451 453 463 468

3.4.1.9.9.1 - Navigation ....................................................................468 3.4.1.9.9.2 - Attaching the entire content of an input to a multiplex .469 3.4.1.9.9.3 - Attaching a service to a multiplex.................................470 3.4.1.9.9.4 - Attaching a component to a multiplex as a ghost component ..............................................................473 3.4.1.9.9.5 - Attaching a component to a (crossing or locally built) service ......................................................................................476 3.4.1.9.9.6 - Attaching a shared component to several (crossing or locally built) services ...........................................................................478 3.4.1.9.9.7 - Attaching a duplicated component to several (crossing or locally built) services ................................................................479

3.4.1.9.10 - SFN Adapter................................................................. 481 3.4.1.9.10.1 - Overview ....................................................................481

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Contents

xxix

3.4.1.9.10.2 - Editing MIP ................................................................ 482

3.4.1.9.11 - Bitrate management..................................................... 488 3.4.1.9.11.1 - Overview.................................................................... 488 3.4.1.9.11.2 - Features..................................................................... 488 3.4.1.9.11.3 - Procedure .................................................................. 489

3.4.1.9.12 - Service Substitution ..................................................... 495 3.4.1.9.12.1 - Overview.................................................................... 495 3.4.1.9.12.2 - Features..................................................................... 496 3.4.1.9.12.3 - Procedure .................................................................. 496

3.4.1.10 - Setting the Video processing ..................................................... 3.4.1.10.1 - Splice setup ................................................................. 3.4.1.10.2 - Transrate setup............................................................ 3.4.1.11 - Setting the global settings .......................................................... 3.4.1.11.1 - Scrambling ................................................................... 3.4.1.11.2 - Installing the GPI device .............................................. 3.4.1.12 - Automation................................................................................. 3.4.1.13 - Editing Data injection and connecting an injected stream ......... 3.4.2 - Stored Configurations menu.................................................................... 3.4.2.1 - Save the current device configuration to any memory ................. 3.4.2.2 - Edit a stored configuration file...................................................... 3.4.2.3 - Export a memory content to a remote PC.................................... 3.4.2.4 - Import a saved configuration from a remote PC .......................... 3.4.2.5 - Apply a saved configuration that will become the current configuration ...................................................................... 3.4.2.6 - Apply an empty configuration that will become the current configuration ................................................................ 3.4.2.7 - Delete the content of a memory ...................................................

503 503 517 532 532 545 547 553 559 560 561 562 563 564 564 565

3.5 - Maintenance menu ........................................................................................ 566 3.5.1 - Reboot menu ........................................................................................... 566 3.5.2 - Options menu .......................................................................................... 567 3.5.3 - Global setting menu ................................................................................ 568 3.6 - Status menu ................................................................................................... 572 3.6.1 - All alarms menu....................................................................................... 572 3.6.2 - Events menu ........................................................................................... 573 3.6.3 - Report menu............................................................................................ 574 3.7 - Monitoring menu ........................................................................................... 575 3.7.1 - MPEG monitoring menu .......................................................................... 3.7.1.1 - Purpose........................................................................................ 3.7.1.2 - Monitoring window layout............................................................. 3.7.1.3 - Operation ..................................................................................... 3.7.2 - Splice monitoring menu ........................................................................... 3.7.3 - Network port counters menu ................................................................... 8566216E(01) September 2010

576 576 576 581 583 585

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

xxx

Contents

3.7.4 - RF monitoring menu ................................................................................ 586 3.8 - Appendix: ECM/EMM filtering using the Command Line Interface ........... 587 3.8.1 - Purpose.................................................................................................... 3.8.2 - Accessing the Command Line Interface .................................................. 3.8.3 - Login and password................................................................................. 3.8.4 - Commands relating to ECM/EMM filtering...............................................

587 587 589 590

CHAPTER 4 SERVICING 4.1 - Introduction .................................................................................................... 594 4.2 - Accessing the Command Line Interface...................................................... 595 4.2.1 - Accessing the Command Line Interface .................................................. 595 4.2.2 - Login and password................................................................................. 598 4.3 - Installing software options ........................................................................... 599 4.3.1 - Introduction .............................................................................................. 599 4.3.2 - Displaying software options (lsopt) .......................................................... 599 4.3.3 - Ordering and installing a software option................................................. 600 4.4 - Downloading software................................................................................... 603 4.4.1 - Introduction .............................................................................................. 4.4.2 - Displaying firmware releases (view) ........................................................ 4.4.3 - Downloading procedure (server, down, view, result, togg) ...................... 4.4.4 - Procedure for returning to the previous software release ........................

603 604 605 608

4.5 - Erasing the current and saved confurations............................................... 609 4.6 - SNMP access rights and Community strings ............................................. 610 4.6.1 - Introduction .............................................................................................. 4.6.1.1 - Accessibility values....................................................................... 4.6.1.2 - Access level values ...................................................................... 4.6.2 - Community string edition .........................................................................

610 610 610 610

4.7 - Maintenance ................................................................................................... 613 4.7.1 - Cleaning chassis ventilation grids............................................................ 4.7.2 - Replacing the fans ................................................................................... 4.7.3 - Replacing a PSU (applicable to NetProcessor 9030/40 model only)....... 4.7.3.1 - Fault diagnosis ............................................................................. 4.7.3.2 - Procedure for replacing a PSU.....................................................

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

613 613 613 613 614

8566216E(01) September 2010

Contents

xxxi

CHAPTER 5 TOOLS 5.1 - Introduction.................................................................................................... 618 5.2 - SigEditor......................................................................................................... 619 5.2.1 - Overview ................................................................................................. 619 5.2.2 - Operation................................................................................................. 619 5.2.3 - Restrictions with release 1.0.3 ................................................................ 622 5.3 - NetProcessor Equipment Setup................................................................... 623 5.3.1 - Purpose ................................................................................................... 5.3.2 - Architecture ............................................................................................. 5.3.3 - Description of the Graphical User Interface ............................................ 5.3.4 - PC setup.................................................................................................. 5.3.5 - Operation................................................................................................. 5.3.5.1 - Launching {NetProcessor Equipment Setup}............................... 5.3.5.2 - User name and Password............................................................ 5.3.5.3 - NetProcessor management in the Equipment area ..................... 5.3.5.3.1 - Adding/Removing NetProcessor to/from the Equipment area............................................................. 5.3.5.3.2 - Connecting/Disconnecting to/from NetProcessor .......... 5.3.5.3.3 - Options management..................................................... 5.3.5.3.4 - Adding NetProcessor to the Download list..................... 5.3.5.3.5 - Removing NetProcessor from the Equipment area ....... 5.3.5.4 - NetProcessor management in the Download area ...................... 5.3.5.5 - Information available in the Messages area ................................

623 623 624 628 629 630 630 632 633 634 638 641 642 643 645

CHAPTER 6 ALARMS 6.1 - Main board, Power Supply alarms and GPI ................................................ 649 6.2 - Interface alarms ............................................................................................. 659 6.2.1 - Alarms on any inputs or outputs .............................................................. 6.2.2 - Alarms on ASI inputs............................................................................... 6.2.3 - Alarms on IP ports, IP Tx and IP Rx........................................................ 6.2.4 - Alarms on ATM board, ATM ports, ATM Tx and ATM Rx ....................... 6.2.5 - Alarms on RF inputs ................................................................................ 6.2.6 - Alarms on GPS inputs .............................................................................

659 666 669 689 702 705

6.3 - Service Processing ....................................................................................... 706 6.3.1 - Multiplexing ............................................................................................. 706 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

xxxii

Contents

6.3.2 - Video processing ..................................................................................... 6.3.3 - Data injection ........................................................................................... 6.3.4 - Access control.......................................................................................... 6.3.5 - Flextream ................................................................................................. 6.3.6 - Bitrate management................................................................................. 6.3.7 - ATSC-M/H................................................................................................ 6.3.8 - Internal problem .......................................................................................

711 718 721 724 726 728 732

6.4 - Redundancy ................................................................................................... 734

INDEX ............................................................................. 737

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications

1

Chapter 1 Specifications 1.1 - System overview .................................................................................... 4 1.2 - Product Overview................................................................................... 9 1.2.1 - NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 common features .. 9 1.2.2 - NetProcessor 9030 specific features .............................................. 10 1.2.3 - NetProcessor 9030/40 specific features ......................................... 10 1.3 - Ordering guide...................................................................................... 11 1.4 - Device description ............................................................................... 25 1.4.1 - Front panel...................................................................................... 25 1.4.2 - Rear panel ...................................................................................... 26 1.4.2.1 - Power outlet ................................................................................... 26 1.4.2.2 - Inputs/Outputs................................................................................ 27

1.4.3 - NetProcessor’s functional architecture ........................................... 40 1.4.4 - ASI network interface...................................................................... 41 1.4.4.1 - MPEG over ASI adaptation layer ................................................... 42 1.4.4.1.1 - ASI interface boards ..................................................................... 42 1.4.4.1.2 - ASI Inputs ..................................................................................... 44 1.4.4.1.3 - ASI Outputs .................................................................................. 45

1.4.4.2 - MPEG over ASI rate capacity ........................................................ 45

1.4.5 - ATM network adaptation................................................................. 46 1.4.5.1 - MPEG over ATM Adaptation layer ................................................. 47 1.4.5.1.1 - Transmission................................................................................. 47 1.4.5.1.2 - Reception...................................................................................... 48

1.4.5.2 - Network interface features ............................................................. 49 1.4.5.2.1 - Multiplexing (ATM layer) ............................................................... 49 1.4.5.2.2 - Data links ...................................................................................... 52 1.4.5.2.3 - Physical layer................................................................................ 58

1.4.5.3 - MPEG over ATM rate capacity ...................................................... 60

1.4.6 - IP network adaptation ..................................................................... 61 1.4.6.1 - MPEG over IP adaptation layer ..................................................... 62 1.4.6.1.1 - Transmission................................................................................. 62

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

2

Chapter 1 - Specifications

1.4.6.1.2 - Reception ...................................................................................... 69

1.4.6.2 - Network Interface ........................................................................... 71 1.4.6.2.1 - IP routing ....................................................................................... 1.4.6.2.2 - MAC Layer and VLAN support ...................................................... 1.4.6.2.3 - IP interface backup status ............................................................. 1.4.6.2.4 - Gigabit Ethernet ports ...................................................................

71 71 72 72

1.4.6.3 - MPEG over IP rate capacity ........................................................... 73 1.4.6.4 - MPEG over IP overheads............................................................... 73 1.4.6.4.1 - Stacks and overheads................................................................... 73 1.4.6.4.2 - Calculating used bandwidth .......................................................... 75

1.4.7 - DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End ........................................................... 76 1.4.7.1 - Overview......................................................................................... 76 1.4.7.2 - Tuner/demodulator features ........................................................... 77 1.4.7.3 - DVB-CI descrambling ..................................................................... 78 1.4.7.3.1 - Overview ....................................................................................... 78 1.4.7.3.2 - Signalling....................................................................................... 79 1.4.7.3.3 - Maximum bitrate and number of components ............................... 79

1.4.8 - TS cross connecting ....................................................................... 80 1.4.8.1 - Inputs and Outputs ......................................................................... 80 1.4.8.2 - Connections.................................................................................... 81 1.4.8.3 - Output throughput........................................................................... 81

1.4.9 - Service processing ......................................................................... 83 1.4.9.1 - Incoming signalling, service and component management............ 85 1.4.9.1.1 - Definitions...................................................................................... 85 1.4.9.1.2 - Incoming signalling management.................................................. 87 1.4.9.1.3 - Service management .................................................................... 88 1.4.9.1.4 - Component management.............................................................. 97 1.4.9.1.5 - ECM management ...................................................................... 101 1.4.9.1.6 - EMM management ...................................................................... 101 1.4.9.1.7 - PCR management....................................................................... 102

1.4.9.2 - Multiplexing................................................................................... 103 1.4.9.3 - Bitrate management with Automatic Component Filtering policy . 104 1.4.9.3.1 - Overview ..................................................................................... 104 1.4.9.3.2 - Automatic Component Filtering policy......................................... 104

1.4.9.4 - Multiplexer overflow management................................................ 106 1.4.9.5 - Output processing ........................................................................ 107 1.4.9.5.1 - PCR and LTW information processing ........................................ 107 1.4.9.5.2 - Outgoing signalling management................................................ 107

1.4.9.6 - Scrambling.................................................................................... 126 1.4.9.6.1 - External SCS mode..................................................................... 126 1.4.9.6.2 - Internal SCS mode ...................................................................... 128

1.4.9.7 - SFN Adaptation ............................................................................ 130 1.4.9.7.1 - Single Frequency Network and SFN Adapter overview .............. 130 1.4.9.7.2 - NetProcessor implementation ..................................................... 131

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications

3

1.4.9.8 - Data Injection ............................................................................... 132 1.4.9.8.1 - Physical interfaces ...................................................................... 132 1.4.9.8.2 - Supervision ................................................................................. 132

1.4.9.9 - Subtitle insertion .......................................................................... 136

1.4.10 - Video processing (available with NetProcessor 9030/40 model only) ............................ 137 1.4.10.1 - Splicing ...................................................................................... 137 1.4.10.1.1 - Overview ................................................................................... 1.4.10.1.2 - Features.................................................................................... 1.4.10.1.3 - Examples of application ............................................................ 1.4.10.1.4 - Splicing features .......................................................................

137 138 139 141

1.4.10.2 - Rate shaping .............................................................................. 146 1.4.10.2.1 - Overview ................................................................................... 146 1.4.10.2.2 - Features.................................................................................... 146

1.4.11 - IP Flextream™............................................................................ 151 1.4.11.1 - Overview .................................................................................... 151 1.4.11.2 - Typical IP Flextream topology.................................................... 153 1.4.11.3 - Specifications ............................................................................. 153

1.4.12 - Performances ............................................................................. 154 1.4.12.1 - Service processing..................................................................... 154 1.4.12.2 - Scrambling ................................................................................. 156

1.5 - Description of the Management systems ........................................ 157 1.5.1 - SNMP agent ................................................................................. 159 1.5.1.1 - Agent............................................................................................ 159 1.5.1.1.1 - Protocol....................................................................................... 159 1.5.1.1.2 - Trap management....................................................................... 159

1.5.1.2 - MIB............................................................................................... 159

1.5.2 - Web Interface ............................................................................... 160 1.5.3 - Command Line Interface (CLI) ..................................................... 161 1.5.4 - XMS 3500 eXtensible Management System ................................ 162 1.6 - Standard Compliance ........................................................................ 163 1.7 - General device Specifications .......................................................... 1.7.1 - Electrical specifications................................................................. 1.7.2 - Mechanical features...................................................................... 1.7.3 - Ventilation ..................................................................................... 1.7.4 - Environmental specifications ........................................................ 1.7.5 - Reliability ......................................................................................

165 165 168 170 171 172

1.8 - EU declaration of conformity ............................................................ 173

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

4

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.1 - System overview

1.1 - SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Two NetProcessor 9030/40 models are available: • NetProcessor 9030 This model is a versatile Multiplexer/Remultiplexer/Scrambler with single AC Power Supply. It can be equipped with a unique variety of interfaces from ASI to Network Adaptation. It caters for several independent output multiplexes and allows scrambling, SI/PSI table/sub-table processing as well as IP streaming including FEC protection of up to 128 streams over IP. This model cannot be upgraded to support the video processing features of NetProcessor 9040.

• NetProcessor 9030/40 This model is a versatile Multiplexer/Remultiplexer/Scrambler with dual Power Supply (AC/AC, AC/DC or DC/DC). It offers the same features as the NetProcessor 9030 plus additional Splicing and Rate Shaping capabilities in option.

Thanks to their large feature-set, NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 can fulfill the requirements of Terrestrial TV, Satellite TV, Cable TV and IPTV.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.1 - System overview

5

For Terrestrial TV, NetProcessor 9030 is ideally suited thanks to its embedded SDH/PDH and DVB-S2 interfaces, its SFN adaptation module and its high capacity of SI/PSI processing.

Figure 1.1: DTTV National Head-End with NetProcessor 9030

NetProcessor 9030/40 features Splicing capability which is particularly useful for regional switchover or Ad insertion.

Figure 1.2: DTTV Regional Head-End with NetProcessor 9030/40

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

6

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.1 - System overview

For Satellite TV, NetProcessor 9030 offers IP interface, IP Flextream, DVB scrambling in simulcrypt with up to 10 CAS (in combination with XMU/XMS), DVB-S/S2 Front-End including DVB descrambling and a high number of processed services. The Rate shaping (Transrating) capability of NetProcessor 9030/40 can be particularly useful to rebuild new stat-muxed bouquets from incoming turnaround feeds.

Figure 1.3: DTH National Head-End with NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.1 - System overview

7

For Cable TV, the capacity to generate and scramble simultaneously up to 6 multiplexes along with its Rate shaping capability makes NetProcessor 9030/40 a very efficient Multiplexer.

Figure 1.4: CATV National Head-End with NetProcessor 9030/40

Figure 1.5: CATV Regional Head-End with NetProcessor 9030/40

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.1 - System overview

For IPTV, NetProcessor 9030 or NetProcessor 9030/40 acts as an IP streamer and scrambler of up to 128 services.

Figure 1.6: IPTV without Rate shaping (NetProcessor 9030 or NetProcessor 9030/40)

NetProcessor 9030/40 is particularly well suited as Rate Shaping is also useful for IPTV applications where the output bandwidth is limited by the DSL line.

Figure 1.7: IPTV with Rate shaping (NetProcessor 9030/40)

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.2 - Product Overview

9

1.2 - PRODUCT OVERVIEW

1.2.1 - NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 common features NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 are highly integrated and powerful MPEG-2 and MPEG-4 standard- and high-definition (SD and HD) transport stream processors that feature outstanding processing capabilities (including transrating and splicing for NetProcessor 9030/40). Key Features • Up to 22 ASI inputs (and up to 213 Mb/s per ASI interface); • Up to 10 ASI outputs (and up to 213 Mb/s per ASI interface); • Input and output telecom interfaces: - 2 x PDH-SDH-SONET/ATM, - 2 x Gigabit Ethernet/IP ports; • Error-free transmission over any network thanks to IP and ATM forward error correction (FEC) and advanced clock recovery mechanisms; • Multiplexing/remultiplexing of up to 64 transport streams received over ASI and telecom interfaces; • Generating up to 6 multiplexes delivered over ASI/Gigabit Ethernet/ATM; • Streaming up from 50 to 128 programs over IP; • Up to 520 Mbps throughput; • Up to 1000 input services, up to 400 output services; • Advanced management of PSI/SI/PSIP tables, service filtering and remapping; • Table Injection/ Filtering from Ethernet and TS inputs; • Ethernet data insertion: Opportunistic or Bandwith Reservation; • Bandwidth management and advanced overflow protection; • SFN adaptation for DVB-T transmission; • DVB-S/DVB-S2 Front-End with conditional-access modules (CAM); 8566216E(01) September 2010

descrambling

capability

through

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

10

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.2 - Product Overview

• DVB common scrambling algorithm, simultaneous support of multiple conditional-access systems (CAS); • Embedded Simulcrypt Synchronizer; • Bitrate allocator for IP Flextream statistical multiplexing of local/remote encoders; • Time synchronization with NTP Server/Client or with TDT/TOT/STT on incoming TS; • Management: Web, SNMP, XMS 3500 eXtensible Management System;

1.2.2 - NetProcessor 9030 specific features • Compact 1U cabinet with AC power supply.

1.2.3 - NetProcessor 9030/40 specific features • Compact 1U cabinet including dual AC or DC power supplies; • Rate shaping of up to 128 MPEG-2 SD or 16 MPEG-2 HD with two NetRater boards; Rate shaping is performed from CBR/VBR to Capped VBR or from CBR/VBR to VBR with statistical multiplexing. • Splicing of up to 64 SD programs (MPEG-2 or MPEG-4) or 32 HD programs (MPEG-2 or MPEG-4) with two NetRater boards. Splicing can be triggered either by digital cue tones (SCTE 35 tables) received from the national or regional Head-End or by GPI or SCTE 30 commands; • Ad/local program insertion (DPI) compliant with SCTE35 and SCTE30;

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.3 - Ordering guide

11

1.3 - ORDERING GUIDE

¤ Bundles

Figure 1.8: Ordering references for NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 - Bundles and options

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

12

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.3 - Ordering guide

¤ I/O extension options

.

Figure 1.9: Ordering references for NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 - I/O extensions

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.3 - Ordering guide

13

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 Bundles

N903BMyzAB: NetProcessor 9030 Single AC PS in 1RU chassis and no video processing capability N903BM00AA

• • • • • •

No ASI module (optional). Includes licenses for 4 TS In and 1 TS Out. No scrambling capability. No Gigabit Ethernet port for MPEG over IP transmissions. No video processing capability. Software Release must be ordered.

N903BMS0AA

• • • • • •

No ASI module (optional). Includes licenses for 4 TS In and 1 TSOut. Scrambling capability. No Gigabit Ethernet port for MPEG over IP transmissions. No video processing capability. Software Release must be ordered.

N903BM0GAA

• • • • • •

No ASI module (optional). Includes licenses for 4 TS In and 1 TS Out. No scrambling capability. Two Gigabit Ethernet ports for MPEG over IP transmissions. No video processing capability. Software Release must be ordered.

N903BMSGAA

• • • • • •

No ASI module (optional). Includes licenses for 4 TS In and 1 TS Out. Scrambling capability. Two Gigabit Ethernet ports for MPEG over IP transmissions. No video processing capability. Software Release must be ordered.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

14

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.3 - Ordering guide

N903BAyzAB: NetProcessor 9030/40 Dual swappable AC PS in 1RU chassis N903BA00ABB

• • • • • •

No ASI module (optional). Includes licenses for 4 TS In and 1 TS Out. No scrambling capability. No Gigabit Ethernet port for MPEG over IP transmissions. Video processing capability by adding 1 or 2 NetRater boards. Software Release must be ordered.

N903BAS0AB

• • • • • •

No ASI module (optional). Includes licenses for 4 TS In and 1 TSOut. Scrambling capability. No Gigabit Ethernet port for MPEG over IP transmissions. Video processing capability by adding 1 or 2 NetRater boards. Software Release must be ordered.

N903BA0GAB

• • • • • •

No ASI module (optional). Includes licenses for 4 TS In and 1 TS Out. No scrambling capability. Two Gigabit Ethernet ports for MPEG over IP transmissions. Video processing capability by adding 1 or 2 NetRater boards. Software Release must be ordered.

N903BASGAB

• • • • • •

No ASI module (optional). Includes licenses for 4 TS In and 1 TS Out. Scrambling capability (except with ATSC-M/H software). Two Gigabit Ethernet ports for MPEG over IP transmissions. Video processing capability by adding 1 or 2 NetRater boards. Software Release must be ordered.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.3 - Ordering guide

15

N903BDyzAB: NetProcessor 9030/40 Dual swappable DC/DC or DC/AC PS in 1RU chassis One DC Power Supply is included. The second Power Supply MUST BE ORDERED and chosen between DC and AC. N903BD00AB

• • • • • •

No ASI module (optional). Includes licenses for 4 TS In and 1 TS Out. No scrambling capability. No Gigabit Ethernet port for MPEG over IP transmissions. Video processing capability by adding 1 or 2 NetRater boards. Software Release must be ordered.

N903BDS0AB

• • • • • •

No ASI module (optional). Includes licenses for 4 TS In and 1 TS Out. Scrambling capability. No Gigabit Ethernet port for MPEG over IP transmissions. Video processing capability by adding 1 or 2 NetRater boards. Software Release must be ordered.

N903BD0GAB

• • • • • •

No ASI module (optional). Includes licenses for 4 TS In and 1 TS Out. No scrambling capability. Two Gigabit Ethernet ports for MPEG over IP transmissions. Video processing capability by adding 1 or 2 NetRater boards. Software Release must be ordered.

N903BDSGAB

• • • • • •

No ASI module (optional). Includes licenses for 4 TS In and 1 TS Out. Scrambling capability (except with ATSC-M/H software). Two Gigabit Ethernet ports for MPEG over IP transmissions. Video processing capability by adding 1 or 2 NetRater boards. Software Release must be ordered.

Power Supplies (Second Power Supply for Dual swappable PS Chassis) N900PS2AAA

Second Power Supply for AC/DC Chassis (mounting kit included), 110/220VAC Version.

N900PS2DAA

Second Power Supply for DC/DC Chassis (mounting kit included), -48VDC Version.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

16

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.3 - Ordering guide

Power Supplies (Spare) N900SPACGA

Spare Power Supply Unit for AC/AC or DC/AC dual PS chassis, 110/220VAC Version.

N900SPDCGA

Spare Power Supply Unit for DC/AC or DC/DC dual PS chassis, -48VDC Version.

Cables (Options) N900RSRJAA

RS232 serial link over RJ45 for fine-tuning and maintenance purposes.

N900PCEUAA

Power cord for continental Europe.

N900PCUSAA

Power cord for US and Japan.

N900PCUKAA

Power cord for UK.

N900PCSWAA

Power cord for Switzerland.

N900PCAUAA

Power cord for Australia.

N900PCARAA

Power cord for Argentina.

Hardware Options Video processing module N9041T00GA

Hardware option. Additional FIRST NetRater module. Can be ordered with NetProcessor 9030/40 (N903BDxxAB) from Version 4.0 to get the video processing capabilities. 16 transrate licenses are included.

N9041TS0GA

Hardware option. On-Site Hardware upgrade to add FIRST NetRater module on a NetProcessor 9030/40 (N903BDxxAB ) from Version 4.0 to get the video processing capabilities. 16 transrate licenses are included.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.3 - Ordering guide

17

N9042T00GA

Hardware option. Additional SECOND NetRater module. Can be installed on NetProcessor 9030/40 (N903BDxxAB) from V4.0. This option must be ordered with the option N9041T00GA (First transrater module). 16 transrate licenses are included.

N9042TS0GA

Hardware option. On-Site Hardware upgrade to add a SECOND NetRater module on NetProcessor 9030/40 (N903BDxxAB) from V4.0. This option must be ordered with option N9041T00GA or N9041TS0GA (1st NetRater). 16 transrate licenses are included.

ASI interfaces N903ASB3GA

Main ASI module with 10 ASI ports configurable as input or output.

N903ASB4GA

Main ASI module with 10 ASI ports configurable as input or output. GPS inputs for SFN adaptation and GPI I/O port. Available from release 4.0.

N903ASB0GB

Main ASI module for the main boards: 4 ASI inputs + 4 ASI outputs + GPS In.

ASI extension N903ASE0GA

ASI extension board, 12 inputs, requires software licenses for port activation. Cannot be ordered without the main ASI board. Exclusive from DVB-S and DVB-S2 Front-End module, GPO board and ATM interfaces.

GPO board N903HGPOAA

Hardware option. GPO Board for NetProcessor. Exclusive from DVB-S and DVB-S2 Front-End module, ASI extension board and ATM interfaces.

SFP Transceivers for Gigabit Ethernet ports N900GSF0GA

SFP duplex optical multimode transceiver for the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

N900GSF1GA

SFP duplex optical single mode short haul transceiver for the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

18

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.3 - Ordering guide

DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End N903HRF1AA

DVB-S and DVB-S2 Front-End module. Exclusive from ASI extension board, GPO board and ATM interfaces. 2 RF inputs, 2 ASI outputs and one slot for a DVB-CI module. Descrambling is possible on one RF input only (see CAM options).

SFP Transceivers for Gigabit Ethernet ports N900GSF0GA

SFP duplex optical multimode transceiver for the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

N900GSF1GA

SFP duplex optical single mode short haul transceiver for the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

Conditional Access Modules (CAM) N900CAMVAA

VIACCESS Professional CAM to descramble VIACCESS encryptions. Descrambles up to 12 TV channels (24 PIDs maximum).

N900CAMMAA

MEDIAGUARD Professional CAM to descramble MEDIAGUARD encryptions. Descrambles up to 12 TV channels (24 PIDs maximum).

N900CAMBAA

BISS 1/E Professional Conditional Access Modules to descramble BISS 1&E encryptions. Descrambles up to 12 TV channels (24 PIDs maximum).

N900CAMCAA

CONAX Professional CAM to descramble CONAX encryptions. Descrambles up to 12 TV channels (24 PIDs maximum).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.3 - Ordering guide

19

ATM extension N903PDH0GA

PDH E3/DS3 network interface board. 2 bidirectional ports - Both ATM ports and 2 streams enabled. Software configurable E3 or DS3. Licenses for additional streams must be ordered (up to 6 licenses for 4 In + 4 Out maximum). Exclusive from DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End module, GPO board and ASI Extension.

N903STMSGA

STM1/OC3 network interface board. 2 bidirectional ports - Both ATM ports and 2 streams enabled. Software configurable STM1 or OC3. SFP modules required. Mix of SFP type is allowed. No license included. Licenses for additional streams must be ordered (up to 6 licenses for 8 In/Out streams maximum). Exclusive from DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End module, GPO board and ASI Extension.

N903STMFGA

STM1/OC3 network interface board. 2 bi-directional ports - Both ATM ports and 2 streams enabled. Software configurable STM1 or OC3. SFP modules required. Mix of SFP type is allowed. Licenses for additional streams must be ordered (up to 8 licenses for 10 In/Out streams maximum). Exclusive from DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End module, GPO board and ASI Extension.

SFP Transceivers for STM1 ports N900SSF0GA

SFP duplex optical multimode transceiver for the STM1 boards.

N900SSF1GA

SFP duplex optical single mode short haul transceiver for the STM1 boards.

N900SSF2GA

SFP duplex optical single mode long haul transceiver for the STM1 boards.

N900SSF3GA

SFP duplex electrical transceiver for the STM1 boards.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

20

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.3 - Ordering guide

Software Options Main Software Options N903SBASAH

NetProcessor 9040 Basic software license release V4.0. 2 active IP connections (for chassis supporting transmission over IP) and 2 ATM connections (for chassis with ATM optional board). Includes the delivery of a documentation CD-ROM.

Input TS Software Options N903ST1XAA

Software option. License for the processing of 1 additional input TS (4 input TS in the basic configuration). Up to 12 options can be ordered to manage a total of 16 input TS.

N903ST1YAA

Software option. License to extend the number of input services above 16. One option per additional service.

Output MPTS Software Options N903ST0XAA

Software option. License for the generation of 1 additional output TS. Up to 5 options can be ordered to get 6 independent output MPTS.

SFN adaptation Software Options N903SSFNAA

Software option. Licence for the SFN Adaptation of 1 additional TS (4 licenses maximum). Requires the hardware option N903ASB0GB or N903ASB4GB (GPS Inputs).

Scrambling Software Options N903SSCXAA

Software option. License for the scrambling of 1 service. Up to 32 licenses can be ordered. More than 32 requires N903SSC3AA option.

N903SSC3AA

Software option. License to extend the number of scrambled services from 32 to all.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.3 - Ordering guide

21

Additional Software Options for internal SCS N903SS1MAA

Option to allow simultaneous scrambling with several CAS (SimulCrypt). Should be ordered when number of CAS >=2.

N903S1RDAA

Optional interface to Irdeto/M-Crypt EMMG and ECMG

N903SC0NAA

Optional interface to Conax EMMG and ECMG

N903SFKSAA

Option to allow Fixed Key Scrambling.

N903SV1AAA

Optional interface to Viaccess EMMG and ECMG.

FEC over IP Software Options N903S1EXAA

Software option. License for the activation of 1 SMPTE 2022-1 FEC engine -input and/or output. Up to 14 (4 In + 10 Out) licenses can be ordered.

ATM Software Options N903SAEXAA

Software option. License for 1 active ATM stream . 2 streams are enabled in the basic configuration. Up to 6 licenses can be ordered with the N903STMSGA/N903PDH0GA boards, up to 8 licenses with the N903STMFGA board.

N903S10AAA

Software option. License for IP data services over ATM over a dedicated 100BTport.

IP Streaming Software Options N903S1PSAA

License for the streaming of a maximum of 128 TS without FEC (mix of SPTS and MPTS max 6 MPTS). Maximum performance depends on device load.

N903S1FSAA

License for the streaming of a maximum of 128 TS (mix of SPTS and MPTS, max 6 MPTS). FEC on 4 IP steam in + 64 IP stream out. Maximum performance depends on device load.

SI/PSI processing N903SS1PAA

8566216E(01) September 2010

Software option. License for the SI/PSI Processing on all generated MPTS. Includes: Component tag, PID ordering, Subtable capabilities and Bitrate management.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

22

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.3 - Ordering guide

Splicing N904SPL2AA

Software option. License for 1 SD splice capability in MPEG2 stream. As many licenses as spliced streams should be ordered. 1 HD stream requires 2 SD licenses.Trigger In-Band (SCTE35) or GPI.

N904SPL4AA

Software option. License for 1 SD splice capability in MPEG4 stream. As many licenses as spliced streams should be ordered. 1 HD stream requires 2 SD licenses. Trigger In-Band (SCTE35) or GPI.

N904SCT3AA

Software option. License for 1 SCTE30 connection (ad insertion in 1 channel). As many licenses as ad inserted streams should be ordered.

Rate Shaping N904S16TAA

Software option. License for 16 additional transrate licenses (16 to 32). One N903S16TAA option maximum per NetRater board.

N904S32TAA

Software option. License for 32 additional transrate licenses (32 to 64). One N903S32TAA option maximum per NetRater board. Cannot be ordered without the N903S16TAA option. Not compatible with any splicing option (N903SPL2AA or N903SPL4AA) for a given NetRater board.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.3 - Ordering guide

23

¤ Splicing and Rate shaping license management NetProcessor 9030/40 is scalable. It can receive up to 2 NetRater boards. The following table gives the number of Rate shaping licenses (called TR licenses for TransRating licenses) required for the Rate shaping of one program according to its type and bitrate: Feature

MPEG-2

1 SD transrate (input bitrate < 5 Mbit/s)

1 TR license

1 SD transrate (input bitrate >= 5 Mbit/s)

2 TR licenses

1 HD transrate

8 TR licenses

MPEG-4 not available with the current release

not available with the current release

The following table gives the number of splicing licenses (called SPL licenses) required for the splicing of one program according to its type: Feature

MPEG-2

MPEG-4

1 SD splice

1 SPL license

1 SPL license

1 HD splice

2 SPL licenses

2 SPL licenses

Now, based on the number of TR licenses and SPL licenses required for your application, you have to consult the following table to find out - how many NetRater boards have to be ordered, - which Splicing and Rate shaping licenses (and how many) have to be ordered.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

24

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.3 - Ordering guide

Figure 1.10: Ordering references for NetProcessor 9040, release 4.0 MPEG-2/4 Splicing and MPEG-2 Rate shaping

Key: • The x-ordinate represents the number of TR licenses, • The y-ordinate represents the number of SPL licenses (where N is the number of MPEG-2 Splicing features and M the number of MPEG-4 Splicing features), • A cell with a blue background means that one NetRater board is required, • A cell with a green background means that two NetRater boards are required, • A cell with an orange background means that the combination is not available, • The figure inside a box represents the software options to be ordered (to be multiplied by 2, N or M as indicated).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

25

1.4 - DEVICE DESCRIPTION

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 are built in a 1RU chassis which is designed for standard 19" racks. Electrical and mechanical features are given at the end of this chapter (page 165).

1.4.1 - Front panel

Figure 1.11: NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 front panel

The front panel features a set of three LEDs to provide a visual indication of overall device operation. The various LEDs indicate the following: LED POWER ALARM WARNING

8566216E(01) September 2010

Color green red orange

Description Device on Major alarm preventing operation Minor alarm not preventing operation or start-up phase

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

26

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.2 - Rear panel 1.4.2.1 - Power outlet The power outlet comprises a connector without an On/Off switch. There are four kinds of power inlet according to the bundles. • N903BAyzAB bundle with one in-built AC Power Supply; • N903BAyzAB bundle with two AC Power Supplies for redundancy. • N903BDyzAB bundle with two Power Supplies for redundancy. One DC Power Supply is included. The second Power Supply MUST BE ORDERED and chosen between DC and AC.

Figure 1.12: Power inlet according to the chassis model

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

27

1.4.2.2 - Inputs/Outputs

N903ASB0GB

N903ASB3GA Clock pps

ASI IN 1 to ASI IN 4

1

2

ASI OUT 1 to ASI OUT 4

3

GPS

4

10 configurable ASI In/Out

N903ASB4GA Clockpps

5

10 configurable ASI In/Out

GPS

6

7

GPI

EXT2

USB

9

8

GPO alarm relay closure

14

RF1

15

12 ASI extension module

RF2

ASI Out 1

ASI Out 2

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6

ATM #2

ATM network interface

8566216E(01) September 2010

USB, EXT 2 not used in this product release

LAN/WAN LAN/WAN port #2 port #1

X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12

ATM #1

12

CMD1 CMD2 TERM

EXT1

13

10 11

Gigabit Ethernet

16

DVB-S/DVB-S2 Front-End

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

28

1

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

ASI IN 1 to ASI IN 4 (N903ASB0 GB board)

2

Four DVB-ASI standard TS coaxial inputs in compliance with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB - PI). These inputs accept 188 or 188 + 16 byte format packets and support Data Packet or Data Burst mode. Features: • Connector type: BNC, 75 ohms • Bitrate: 270Mbit/s • MPEG bitrate: from 100 kbps to 213 Mbps • Accepted format: 188, 188+16 (no Reed-Solomon decoding support). • Accepted traffic: Data burst mode (byte per byte) or Data Packet mode (packet per packet). • Code: 8b/10b • Min. sensitivity (D21.5 idle pattern): 200 mV • Max. input voltage: 880 mV p-p • Return loss (S11 in the range 0.1 to 1.0 x bitrate): - 17 dB • Return loss between 0.3 MHz and 1 GHz: - 15 dB

ASI OUT 1 Four DVB-ASI standard TS coaxial outputs in compliance with to CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB - PI). These outputs support 188 or ASI OUT 4 188 + 16 byte format packets and Data Packet or Data Burst mode. (N903ASB0 Features: GB board) • Connector type: BNC, 75 ohms • Bitrate: 270 Mbit/s • MPEG bitrate: from 100 kbps to 213 Mbps • Generated format: 188, 188+16 (no Reed-Solomon encoding support). • Generated traffic: Data Packet or Data Burst mode. • Code: 8b/10b • Output voltage: 800 mV +/- 10% • Deterministic Jitter: 10% • Random Jitter: 8% • Rise/fall time (20-80%): 1.2 ns

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

3

GPS (N903ASB0 GB board)

29

Two inputs Clock (Left Hand Side connector) and pps (Right Hand Side connector) used to synchronize the optional in-built SFN Adapter by an external GPS receiver (for instance, the following model can be used: http://www.spectracomcorp.com/ProductsServices/TimingSynchronizati on/GPSTimeFrequencyReferences/EC20SEpsilonGPSClock/tabid/1310/ Default.aspx) Features: Clock input The clock input is not used in this release. Trigger input The trigger input is used to connect a 1 PPS signal from a GPS receiver when using SFN adaptation option. The connector is BNC. Interface is 50 Ohms terminated and AC coupled. Electrical features are as follows: • VIH High level Input Voltage: between 2 V and 5.5 V • VIL Low level Input Voltage: between 0 V and 0.8 V • Pulse width : 35 ns

4

ASI 1 to ASI 10 (N903ASB3 GA board)

5

ASI 1 to ASI 10

Ten DVB-ASI standard TS coaxial ports in compliance with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB - PI). These ports can be programmed individually as inputs or outputs via the CLI interface (sasiin command). When a port is programmed as an output, the orange LED located near the connector lights up. All output ports are grouped on the right hand side of the strip. Features: Refer to mark for ports programmed as inputs and refer to mark for ports programmed as outputs. Identical to ASI 1 to ASI 10 connectors of the N903ASB3GA board. Refer to mark .

(N903ASB4 GA board)

6

GPS (N903ASB4 GA board)

8566216E(01) September 2010

Identical to GPS connectors of the N903ASB0GB board. Refer to mark .

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

30

7

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

GPI I/O (N903ASB4 GA board)

The GPI I/O consists of a GPI Out alarm relay closure interface used for remote NetProcessor alarm management and a GPI In interface used to trigger service replacement. The connector is male HD15. You are recommended to use an AWG 20 gauge cable. The pinout is given below: Pin

Function

1

BS1 Relay Inactive 6

BS1 Common 11 BS1 Relay Active

2

BS2 Relay Inactive 7

BS2 Common 12 BS2 Relay Active

3

BS3 Relay Inactive 8

BS3 Common 13 BS3 Relay Active

4

GPIN_1 9

GPIN_0 14 GPIN_2

5

P3V3_protected (200mA) 10

GPI Common 15 GND

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

31

GPI Out interface GPI Out is performed via insulated relays BS1, BS2 and BS3. All three points of each relay are provided on the connector. The following table gives relay position (i-e which pin is connected to Common). • BS1 shows whether the NetProcessor is powered. • BS2 shows Red "alarm" Front panel LED state. • BS3 shows Orange "warning" Front panel LED state. Condition

BS1

BS2

BS3

NetProcessor not powered

Inactive

Inactive

Inactive

NetProcessor powered

Active

_

_

Major Alarm

Active

Active

_

Minor Alarm

Active

_

Active

Electrical characteristics are as follows: • Nominal characteristics • Switched voltage: 24 Vdc or 24 Veff • Switched Current: 0.5 A @ 25°C • Switched Power: 15 VA • Insulation > 200 V • Ratings • Max Voltage: 110 Vdc or 125 VAC • Max Current: 1 A • Max Power: 30 W or 37.5 VA A 3.3 V voltage is available on pin 5 to power the alarm lines. It is overload protected. Max current is 150 mA. GPI Out interface P3

3V3 10k 3V3

4.7k 8 BS1_Ctrl

¤

16

OE

+ 1

470 470

3

2 4

0.5A

GPI_OUT_1 interface output

6

7 5

BS1_Relay_Inactive BS1_Relay_Active

BS1_Common BS1_Relay_Inactive BS1_Relay_Active BS2_Common BS2_Relay_Inactive BS2_Relay_Active BS3_Common BS3_Relay_Inactive BS3_Relay_Active GPI_IN0 GPI_IN1 GPI_IN2 GPI_IN_Common P3V_Protected

BS1_Common

GPI_OUT_1 interface output GPI_OUT_1 interface output

8566216E(01) September 2010

0.2A

6 1 11 7 2 12 8 3 13 9 4 14 10 5 15 17

o o o o o

o o o

o o

o o o

o

o

¤

3V3

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

32

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

GPI In interface GPI In is performed via opto-couplers. Inputs shares a floating common point. Provided insulation is 200V. The board provides 3 inputs. Each input is protected against over current with a Positive Temperature Coefficient. Each input is protected against over voltage with a Varistor. Level is polled periodically. Polling period is 1 second. Active level is settable in the Web Graphical User Interface. GPI In interface P3 ¤

16

1k

470

0.2A GPI_IN_0

GPIO_GPIN_0 OE

470 400pF

GPIN_EN_L

GPI_IN_Common

GPI_IN_0 interface input GPI_IN_1 interface output

BS1_Common BS1_Relay_Inactive BS1_Relay_Active BS2_Common BS2_Relay_Inactive BS2_Relay_Active BS3_Common BS3_Relay_Inactive BS3_Relay_Active GPI_IN0 GPI_IN1 GPI_IN2 GPI_IN_Common P3V_Protected 0.2A

GPI_IN_2 interface output

6 1 11 7 2 12 8 3 13 9 4 14 10 5 15 17

o o o o o

o o o o

o

o o o o o

¤

3V3

8

EXT1 Gigabit Ethernet port

Ethernet link for data service. The Data service feature consists of Ethernet bridging between Ext_1 port (configured as a 10/100/1000 Ethernet port) and one ATM PVC. Only EXT_1 port is used. Features: • Standard: IEEE 802.3-2002 • Bitrate: 10/100/1000 Mbit/s with autosensing. • Operating mode: Half duplex/Full duplex with autonegotiation. • Code: Manchester / dibit-PAM (Gigabit Ethernet). • Connector type: RJ45. • Auto-crossover mechanism (Auto MDI/MDI-X) for cable connection. • Input impedance: 110 ohms. • Cabling requirement: Cat5E cable. • EMC and Security: Acc. To IEEE 802.3-2002 • Permissible output Jitter: Acc. To IEEE 802.3-2002 • Input Jitter tolerance: Acc. To IEEE 802.3-2002

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

9

WAN/LANGigabit Ethernet ports

8566216E(01) September 2010

33

Two Gigabit Ethernet ports for transmission over IP networks. Features: • Standard: IEEE 802.3-2002 • Number: 2 • Bitrate: 10/100/1000 Mbit/s with autosensing. • Operating mode: Half duplex/Full duplex with autonegotiation. • Code: Manchester / dibit-PAM (Gigabit Ethernet). • Connector type: RJ45 and SFP (Small Form-Factor Pluggable, for 1000 Mbit/s only). • Auto-crossover mechanism (Auto MDI/MDI-X) for cable connection on RJ45 connector. • Input impedance: 110 Ohms. • Cabling requirement: Cat5E cable for RJ45, mono or multi-mode fiber for SFP. • EMC and Security: Acc. To IEEE 802.3-2002 • Permissible output Jitter: Acc. To IEEE 802.3-2002 • Input Jitter tolerance: Acc. To IEEE 802.3-2002 RJ45 and SFP connector usage are mutually exclusive. SFP Module characteristics: Single Mode • Type of interface: Single mode 1300 nm optical. • Standard: IEEE 802.3z 1000Base-LX. • Connector: LC-Duplex. • Typical cable length: Up to 10,000m with 9um single mode fiber. • Up to 550 m with 50/125 or 62.5/125 multimode fiber. • Output Power: -9.5 dBm to -3 dBm • Input Power: -20 dBm to -3 dBm • Stressed receiver sensitivity: -14.4 dBm • Regulatory compliance: - UL, - Eye safety: - US FDA CDRH AEL Class 1, CDRH certified, - EN(IEC)60825-1,2, EN60950 TUV certified Class 1.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

34

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

Multi Mode • Type of interface: Multi mode 850 nm optical. • Standard: IEEE 802.3z 1000Base-SX • Typical cable length: Up to 275 m with 62.5/125 type. • Up to 550 m with 50/125 type. • Connector: LC-Duplex. • Output Power: -9.5 dBm to 0 dBm • Input Power: -17 dBm to 0 dBm (standard 1 dBm penalty is accounted for on shipping). • Regulatory compliance: - UL, - Eye safety: - US FDA CDRH AEL Class 1, CDRH certified, - EN(IEC)60825-1,2, EN60950 TUV certified Class 1. CMD 1 100Base-T

Ethernet link for device supervision. This link can also be used to inject ECMs and for connection with the external SCS Simulcrypt Synchronizer. For external data injection or for connection with ECMG when "internal SCS" scrambling mode is enabled on NetProcessor, it is advisable to use the other 100Base-T interface (CMD2) to prevent saturation of this control link. The IP addresses of interfaces CMD 1 and CMD 2 must be different. Features: • Standard: IEEE 802.3-2002 • Bitrate: 10/100 Mb/s with autosensing. • Operating mode: Half duplex/Full duplex with autonegotiation. • Code: Manchester encoding. • Connector type: RJ45 • Pinout: Co lli sio n

Sp ee d/ A ct iv ity

10

8

1

Full 100

Pin 1: TDP (Transmitted Data +) Pin 2: TDN (Transmitted Data -) Pin 3: RDP (Received Data +) Pin 4: Not connected Pin 5: Not connected Pin 6: RDN (Received Data -) Pin 7: Not connected Pin 8: Not connected

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

• • • • • • •

35

Input impedance: 110 ohms Auto-crossover mechanism (Auto MDI/MDI-X) for cable connection. Cabling: two twisted pairs, category STP5 or FTP5 EMC and Security: according to IEEE 802.3-2002 Permissible output jitter: according to IEEE 802.3-2002 Input jitter tolerance: according to IEEE 802.3-2002 LEDs: Four LEDs indicate operation modes. Left LED above the connector (Collision) Yellow fixed: collision Off = no collision Right LED above the connector (Speed/Activity) Green fixed: link Green flashing: activity Off: no link, no activity Top LED on the right hand side of the connector (Full) Green fixed = Full Duplex Off = Half Duplex Bottom LED on the right hand side of the connector (100) Green fixed = 100Mbps Off = 10Mbps

11

CMD 2 100Base-T

It is advisable to use this 100Base-T interface for data injection (tables, private data, EMM,...). This interface is also used for connection with ECMG when "internal SCS" scrambling mode is enabled on NetProcessor. The IP addresses of interfaces CMD 1 and CMD 2 must be different. Features: Same features as CMD 1 port.

12

TERM RJ45 for serial link

RS232 serial link over RJ45 for fine-tuning and maintenance purposes. • RJ45 pinout on NetProcessor: 8

1

• RJ45-SubD9 female cable wiring:

The connector provides 2 LEDs. These LED are lit to indicate the end of product boot phase.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

36

13

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

GPO alarm The GPO alarm relay closure interface is used for remote management of relay the following NetProcessor alarms: closure Relay 1: Power off (in normal situation, NetProcessor is powered on and this relay is active). Relay 2: Error status (in normal situation, there is no error and this relay is inactive) Relay 3: Warning status (in normal situation, there is no warning and this relay is inactive). In a system configuration, the different chassis alarm outputs can be grouped together to form parallel contacts which are Normally Open (Normally stands for "device at power on, with no alarms, with no error") or to serialize contacts which are Normally Closed. The pinout of the SUB-D 9/female connector is as follows: Pin Signal 1 Relay 2 (Common) 2 Relay 3 (Normally Closed) 3 Relay 3 (Normally Open) 4 Relay 1 (Common) 5 Relay 3 (Common) 6 Relay 2 (Normally Closed) 7 Relay 2 (Normally Open) 8 Relay 1 (Normally Open) 9 Relay 1 (Normally Closed) The relay closure interface is shown below - this situation corresponds to the normal situation, i-e relay 1 active (power on), relay 2 inactive (no error) and relay 3 inactive (no warning):

This option is not compatible with the 12 ASI In Extension interface, the ATM Network interface and the DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End which use the same board location.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

14

37

ATM Net- The ATM network interface is used for transmission (Tx/Rx) over the work Inter- Telecom network. The ATM network interface can be a SDH/SONET face board or a PDH board. Each board hosts two ATM ports. No mix of PDH and SDH is possible for the 2 ports. This option is not compatible with the 12 ASI In Extension interface, the GPO alarm relay closure and the DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End which use the same board location. ATM SDH/Sonet board

SDH/SONET Features: • Standard: Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) Multi-Source Agreement (MSA), • Number: 2, independent. • Bitrate: 155.520 Mbit/s + 20ppm. • Framing: STM1 VC4 mapping or STS3c. • Connector type: SFP. • Cabling requirement: Performance and reliability are only guaranteed when using Thomson Video Networks SFP modules. • Permissible output jitter: Complies with ITU-T G825 "The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)". This device shall not be used as a reference clock (neither primary nor slave). • Input jitter tolerance: Complies with ITU-T G824 "The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 1544 kbit/s hierarchy". SFP Module Features: Electrical N900SSF3AA • Code: CMI. • Type of interface: electrical interface. • Standard: ITU-T G703 "Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces". • Connectors: 75 ohm female BNC. Electrical SFP module is provided with two BNC adaptation cables. The BNC connectors should be mounted on a panel. Optical, Short haul N900SSF1AA • Type of interface: Monomode 1330 nm optical Short haul. • Standard: S1.1 ITU-T G957 "Optical interfaces for equipment and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy". • Connector: LC-Duplex. • Output Power: -15 dBm to -8 dBm. • Input Power: -28 dBm to -8 dBm (standard 1 dBm penalty is accounted for on shipping). • Security: Optical security standard EN650825 is complied with (class 1 laser). • Code: NRZ

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

38

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

Optical, Long haul N900SSF2AA • Type of interface: Monomode 1330 nm optical Long haul. • Standard: L1.1 ITU-T G957 "Optical interfaces for equipment and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy". • Connector: LC-Duplex. • Output Power: -5 dBm to -0 dBm. • Input Power: -34 dBm to -10 dBm (standard 1 dBm penalty is accounted for on shipping). • Security: Optical security standard EN650825 is complied with (class 1 laser). • Code: NRZ. Optical, Multimode N900SSF0AA • Type of interface: Multimode 1330 nm optical. • Connector: LC-Duplex. • Optical fiber: 62.5/125/0.275 • Output Power: -20 dBm to -14 dBm. • Input Power: -29 dBm to -14 dBm (standard 1 dBm penalty is accounted for on shipping). • Security: Optical security standard EN650825 is complied with (class 1 laser). • Code: NRZ. ATM PDH board

PDH Features: • Standard: ITU-T J131 / ETS 300814 DVB interfaces to PDH networks ITU-T G703 PDH interface. • Rate: 34.368 Mbit/s + 20ppm (E3) or 44.736 Mbit/s + 20ppm (DS3). • Rate selection: software configurable on each port independently. • Connectors: 75 ohm female BNC. • E3 line encoding: HDB3 electrical interface ITU-T G703. • E3 Jitter generation and tolerance: ITU-T G823. The device cannot be used as a primary or slave clock reference. • DS3 Framing: ITU-T G804 with HEC based mapping (G832 frame). • DS3 line encoding: B3ZS electrical interface ITU-T G703 and ANSI T1.107. • DS3 Jitter generation and tolerance: ITU-T G824. The device cannot be used as a primary or slave clock reference. • DS3 Framing: ITU-T G804 either with HEC based or PLCP mapping (C-bit parity frame style).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

39

15

12 ASI IN module

Twelve DVB-ASI standard TS coaxial inputs in compliance with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB - PI). These inputs accept 188 or 188 + 16 byte format packets and support Data Packet mode and Data Burst mode. This option is not compatible with the ATM Network interface, the GPO alarm relay closure and the DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End which use the same board location. Features: • Refer to mark

16

DVB-S DVB-S2 Front-End

The DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End provides 2 RF Inputs that accept DVB-S or DVB-S2 signals. It carries out QPSK / 8PSK demodulation providing two TS available for multiplexing and descrambling. The PCMCIA slot accepts one DVB-CI module (CAM) in order to descramble a set of components in one demodulated TS. The two ASI outputs on the board provide the two demodulated TS either prior descrambling or after descrambling according to Operator’s choice in the GUI. The DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End option is not compatible with the ATM Network interface, the GPO alarm relay closure and the 12 ASI In Extension interface which use the same board location. Features for each RF input/tuner/demodulator: • Frequency: from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz • LNB control: Head alimentation (On / Off), Frequency range (High Band / Low Band) and Polarization (Vertical -13V / Horizontal -18V) can be set from the Web Graphical User Interface • DVB-S or DVB-S2 standard is selected from the Web Graphical User Interface • DVB-S features are as follows: • Symbol Rate: 5 to 45 MBauds, • Demodulation: QPSK, • FEC: Auto, 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, • Spectral Inversion: Auto. • DVB-S2 features are as follows: • Application area and profile: Broadcast service only, • Symbol Rate: 7 to 30 MBauds, • Demodulation: QPSK / 8PSK, • BCH: 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10 for QPSK modulation and 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10 for QAM modulation, • Spectral Inversion: Auto. CAM supported • ASTON PRO (BISS, Mediaguard, Viaccess, Conax); • SMARTDTV (Nagravision); • SMIT (Irdeto, Cryptoworks). Some modules have to be ordered directly by the end customer from the CAS provider (SMARTDTV/Nagravision and SMIT)

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

40

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.3 - NetProcessor’s functional architecture NetProcessor’s functional architecture is shown below. Input Interfaces

ATM Rx channels

ASI In + Ext ASI In

Output Interfaces ATM

ATM

ASI

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM/PDH/SDH Network

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM Tx channels

ASI ASI

Service Processing

ASI

ASI ASI Out

ASI

RF In

IP Rx streams

DVB-S / DVB-S2

ETH

ASI ASI ETH

ETH

ETH

DATA

IP Network ETH

ETH

Data injection

IP Tx streams

1. Some features are allowed by software options. 2. « 12 extension ASI In » option, « ATM » option, « GPO » option and « DVB S / DVB-S2" option are mutually exclusive.

Figure 1.13: NetProcessor functional architecture

Each processing stage will be described in the following sections.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

41

1.4.4 - ASI network interface

4 ASI In with N903ASB0GB board or Q ASI In where 0 DigiCypher, DigiCypher -> ISO, DigiCypher -> DigiCypher) according to the devices located up- and downstream. 3. When NetProcessor is configured to manage DigiCypher streams, it is no longer possible to manage streams in DVB mode (it is not possible to have one output TS in DigiCypher mode and another one in DVB mode for instance).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

85

1.4.9.1 - Incoming signalling, service and component management This section dealts with incoming signalling, service and component management to build outgoing multiplex and also includes PCR, EMM and ECM management. 1.4.9.1.1 - Definitions Added component

A component which is added to one or several services.

Crossing component An incoming component which is authorized to be present in one or several outgoing TS. Crossing ECM

An incoming ECM which is authorized to be present in one or several outgoing TS.

Crossing service

An incoming service which is authorized to be present in one or several outgoing TS.

Generated service (also called locally built service) A service which is locally created in the Multiplexer by the Operator via the Web Graphical User Interface. Default component transmission status Status of transmission (transmitted or suspended or stopped) for components whose transmission status is not explicitly given. PSI-SI related component Packets conveying PSI-SI tables. When a component is PSI/SI-related, the PID is set according to the standard (except for PMT PIDs). Ghost component

A component which is not described in the signalling tables (neither as a standard component nor as an ECM or EMM).

Private table

A table whose table_id is declared as "user defined" in ETR 300 468.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

86

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

Internally processed table and Ghost injected table A table is labeled as ’internally processed’ if it is delivered to an output TS through a NetProcessor internal carousel. Four ways are used to build an internally processed table: • Automatic rebuilding of SI/PSI tables; • downloading from a file (for NIT actual, BAT and TOT only); • downloading through PSIG/PITG protocol; • filtering through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option. Otherwise the table is labeled as ’ghost injected’, i-e externally injected as ghost component through ASI/ATM/Gigabit Ethernet interfaces or Ethernet injected using DVB-Simulcrypt protocol. Shared component

A component which is shared between several services.

Standard component A component which is described in the second loop of the PMT.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

87

1.4.9.1.2 - Incoming signalling management Incoming signalling tables are used to provide monitoring information and build outgoing multiplexes (signalling and data). Each incoming TS can be configured independently. In order to recover tables, corresponding PIDs are extracted. The maximum number of PIDs simultaneously extractible is 1450 (for all inputs). Extracted PIDs and analyzed tables are respectively 0 (PAT), 1 (CAT), x (PMTs), where x is used for PMT PID values which are recovered from PAT content, 17 (SDT) and 18 (EIT). TDT and TOT can also be extracted in order to set equipment time (idem for STT with ATSC standard). Incoming tables of "other" types can be transmitted in CUSTOM mode only (available with DVB standard only). Default component transmission status can be transmitted or stopped. An alarm is generated when a subtable is missing or partially received within a given time (called timeout or recurrence survey): - PAT does not occur at least every 2 s; - PMTs do not occur at least every 2 s on each program_map_PID which is referred to in the PAT; - CAT does not occur at least every 8 s; - SDT actual tables do not occur at least every 10 s (available with DVB standard only); - EIT p/f actual tables do not occur at least every 10 s (available with DVB standard only); - EIT schedule actual tables do not occur at least every 90 s (available with DVB standard only).

No alarm is generated when a PSIP subtable is missing or partially received.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

88

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1. Several incoming PMTs can share the same PID (they will be processed normally). 2. A table is considered valid if the following conditions have been fulfilled: - All the corresponding sections have been received; - Each section has a correct CRC; - Consistency between PID and table_id is considered as valid. 3. When input signalling mode is set to CUSTOM mode, the recurrence survey for EIT p/f actual and EIT schedule actual can be disabled (available with DVB standard only).

1.4.9.1.3 - Service management 1.4.9.1.3.1 - Overview Services present in the outgoing multiplex are either locally built or recovered from incoming TSs (in the latter case, the service is labeled as a "crossing service"). Components used to create services can be locally injected or recovered from incoming TSs. 1.4.9.1.3.2 - Locally built services The maximum number of locally built services is 64. The Operator can use incoming components or locally built components to populate locally built services. Service ID, PMT PID, PCR PID, service name, service type (TV, Radio, etc.), provider name, running status (undefined, not running, start in a few seconds, pausing, running) and service status (On_Air or Off_Air) can be set by the Operator for each locally built service. EIT schedule flag and EIT present following flag are automatically set according to EIT management (available with DVB standard only).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

89

The service can be set to ON_AIR or OFF_AIR or SUSPENDED or STOPPED. The impact on signalling tables is given in the following table: Service status

PAT

SDT ( DVB standard only)

PMT

OFF AIR

Service not declared

Service declared

No PMT

ON AIR

Service declared

Service declared

present

SUSPENDED

Service not declared

Service not declared

No PMT

STOPPED

Service not declared

Service not declared

No PMT

If the service is set to OFF_AIR, then the running status is forced to "not running". If the service is set to STOPPED, then the service is removed from the output TS, it is no longer present in the signalling tables and its configuration (descriptors, components,...) is erased. If the service is set to SUSPENDED, then the service is removed from the output TS, it is no longer present in the signalling tables but its configuration (descriptors, components,...) is not erased. Its parameters are still displayed in the NetProcessor Web Graphical User Interface. The service is ready for application by setting it to ON_AIR. 1.4.9.1.3.3 - Incoming & crossing services Crossing services are chosen from incoming services and are either explicitly or implicitly defined. The maximum number of incoming services accepted for all managed TSs is 1000. The maximum number of crossing services for all managed TSs is 400. It is possible to: - stop all incoming services except for one or more services, - authorize transmission of all services except for one or more services, - authorize transmission of all services and edit some of these services. When a crossing service is explicitly defined, all the following parameters can be set: output service ID, service name, service type, PCR PID and PMT PID, running status, service status, provider name. These parameters replace the original ones (i.e. the parameters present in the incoming signalling tables). Manual remapping of crossing service PCR PIDs is also possible.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

90

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

It is possible to keep some parameters and edit others (e.g. keep the original service name but edit the service_ID). The crossing service status can be set to ON_AIR or OFF_AIR. The impact on signalling tables is given in the following table: Service status

PAT

OFF AIR

Service not declared Service declared

ON AIR

SDT ( DVB standard only) Service declared

PMT

Running status

No PMT

Service declared

Present

Forced to the configured value or to "not running" if there is no configured value. • "running" if incoming service status is OFF AIR, or • incoming running status value if existing, or • "running" which is the default value when no incoming value exists.

EIT schedule flag and EIT present following flag are automatically set according to EIT management (for DVB standard only). 1.4.9.1.3.4 - service ID conflict In each output TS, a unique service ID is allocated to each broadcast service, whether they are locally built or crossing. If the service ID required by a "potential" locally built service is not available because it has been allocated to another locally built service, then the service will not be transmitted and an alarm will be raised. If the required service ID is changed via the management system, the service is transmitted and the alarm is released. In the event of service ID conflicts between several crossing services or locally built services, the first service to require the ID will obtain it and the following candidates will be stopped. There are as many alarms as stopped services. When service A is stopped due to service ID conflicts with service B, A will be automatically transmitted if service B disappears or is stopped via the management system. If several services are stopped, the one transmitted will not necessarily be the first one that was stopped.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

91

1.4.9.1.3.5 - Service redundancy ¤ Purpose Service redundancy allows to define a "backup" service for any input service which is multiplexed in the NetProcessor. The switch from the nominal to the backup service is triggered on stream error (no stream received, PMT or PAT absence) or . whenever a "surveyed" component disappears or falls below a given bitrate. Additionally, it is possible to control the switch through a GPI or SNMP command. Switching back to the nominal can be done automatically after a "holdover" period, or from SNMP or GPI. Service redundancy does not attempt to make a clean transition. The services are switched regardless of the picture type and GOP boundaries. Use Cases: "Service redundancy" is not intended to replace the "ASI channel redundancy" managed by XMS/XMU. Actually, the "Service redundancy" feature of NetProcessor should be particularly useful in the following situations: • No XMS/XMU is used to control the NetProcessor • Some incoming sources on NetProcessor are not managed by XMS/XMU (IRD, 3rd party encoder, etc.) • Some incoming sources on NetProcessor are not redunded (for instance, on IRD failure, NetProcessor can replace the faulty service with a service delivered by a MPEG server). ¤ Processing The service redundancy feature is used to replace one input service by another input service. One service is identified as nominal, the other one is identified as backup. Depending on the switch status, the nominal service can be 'Active' and the backup Service 'Standby' or conversely the nominal service can be 'Standby' and the backup Service 'Active’. When a switch from nominal to backup is triggered: • Components from the backup service are routed to the output; • Components PID are updated with the PID of the components of the nominal service or PID set by the Operator; • The output signalling is frozen. It means that output parameters at service level, service and component descriptors in PMT and SDT, event and component

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

92

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

descriptors in EIT are no longer updated if configured as to be inherited from the the nominal service. When a switch from backup to nominal is triggered: • Components from the nominal service are routed to the output; • Output parameters (at service level), service and component descriptors in PMT and SDT, event and component descriptors in EIT are updated according to the nominal service if configured as to be inherited from the input. ¤ Configuring the service redundancy This section gives the rules to observe when configuring the service redundancy: • Nominal and backup services may come from the same or different inputs and interfaces; • Service redundancy applies to crossing service at crossing component level only. It cannot be performed on locally built or crossing services with attached components; • The backup service and nominal service can have different service ID; • A backup service can have more than one nominal services; • A nominal service cannot have more than one backup service; • A backup service cannot be backed up by another backup service; • A backup service can be used in a Multiplexer output TS; • A backup service cannot be an insertion service for splicing. • A nominal service can be used for service substitution and video processing (splicing, clamping) even during redundancy period; • A backup service can have more components than the nominal service; • Component PID matching between nominal and backup must be explicitly configured. - At least one nominal PID must map one backup PID otherwise the service redundancy configuration is rejected, - A backup component can match several nominal components of the same service; - Nominal components which do not match backup components are considered as permanent components. They are transmitted during redundancy period; NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

93

- backup components which do not match nominal components are not transmitted into the output service during redundancy period; ¤ Trigger The trigger sources for nominal service to backup service switch and for backup service to nominal service switch back can be Internal analysis or External. In the former case (Internal analysis), all video and audio components of the nominal and backup services are checked. The Operator can specify for each component the parameter that has to be taken into account. It can be the absence of the component in the PMT (PMT survey) and/or a bitrate of the component less or equal to a minimum bitrate (bitrate survey). In the latter case (External), the switch back is triggered either by a GPI or by the Operator through the NetProcessor Web Graphical User Interface or by a Supervisor using SNMP. ¤ Switch back The service redundancy feature offers two switching back modes, the Revertible mode and the Non revertible mode. In Revertible mode, connection goes back to nominal when nominal has been correct for a "holdover" period of time. When the revertible mode is used, a global parameter called "replacement holdover" must be set by the Operator. Holdover is the time for a nominal to be continuously correct before switching back from backup. In Non Revertible mode, connection does not go back automatically after a switch over. The switch back occurs if a trigger (manual or internal analysis) is enabled and the nominal input is correct. ¤ Switch status The switch status is available in the NetProcessor Web Graphical User Interface and through SNMP.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

94

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.9.1.3.6 - Service substitution ¤ Purpose Service substitution can be seen as an alternative to splicing. Instead of processing the video and audio elementary streams, the service substitution relies on a PMT table change which actually brings about a kind of channel zapping in the receiver. Unlike splicing, the service substitution results in video and audio PID modifications which are signalled in a new PMT version. Only the service ID and the PMT PID are kept unchanged. As the receiver will have to restart on the new A/V PIDs, the program transition is handled by the receiver itself and the result might be different from one brand to another (more or less black or frozen pictures at the transition, audio fading, etc.). The strong advantage of service substitution is that it allows switching between programs that are completely different: for instance, from MPEG-2 to MPEG-4, from SD to HD, or from scrambled to unscrambled. Another interest is that the two programs (primary and secondary) are taken at the output of the Multiplexer (they can be "on air", "suspended" or "off air"); therefore, it is possible to build the two programs as required (component attachment, PID remapping, channel name, PMT descriptors, scrambling parameters, etc.) prior to the switch. The evident benefit of this solution is that it does not require the video processing hardware (NetRater board) and it can be performed on a simple NetProcessor 9030. Another advantage is the latency which can remain very low (50 msec) when the other services do not require transrating or splicing. The service substitution can be triggered via SCTE-35 (In-band cue-tone), GPI, or SNMP commands. Use Cases: As the transition is not seamless, the service substitution is not really suitable for ad insertion. Nevertheless, the transition is visible yet clean, and this feature will be good enough for regional program switchover or "time-shared" services that are not switched as frequently as ad insertion. In conclusion, service substitution is more flexible and less expensive than splicing and it can provide a good alternative to splicing when the transition does not have to be perfectly seamless. ¤ Processing The service substitution feature is used to replace one output service (the primary service) by another output service (the secondary service). The primary service is also named the substituted service.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

95

When a switch is triggered, the former active service becomes standby and conversely the former standby service becomes active and the following actions are completed: • Components from the active service are routed to the output; • Video and audio PID modifications are signalled in a new PMT version. Only the service ID, service status and PMT PID are kept unchanged; • All information configured as to be inherited from the input are updated with the values from the active service: - Service and component descriptors in PMT, - Service and component descriptors in SDT, - Event and component descriptors in EIT; • All parameter/descriptors set by the Operator are not kept; • EIT attached to the outgoing service are remapped to cope with the active service; • PIDs listed in the component loop of the PMT are updated to cope with the PIDs of the components from the active service. ¤ Configuring the service substitution This section gives the rules to observe when configuring the service substitution: • Primary services and secondary services can be crossing services or built services; • An output service cannot be a primary service and a secondary service; • Secondary service can be an outgoing service; • A primary service cannot have several secondary services; • A secondary service can replace more than one primary service; • The number of components of the secondary service can be different than the number of components of the primary service; • Primary services and secondary services can share components; • An output service used for service substitution can also be used for video processing (splicing, clamping).

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

96

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

¤ Trigger Switch-over is triggered either by SCTE35 (In-band cue tones) or by GPI or by the Operator through the NetProcessor Web Graphical User Interface or by a Supervisor using SNMP. ¤ Switch status The switch status is available in the NetProcessor Web Graphical User Interface and through SNMP.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

97

1.4.9.1.4 - Component management 1.4.9.1.4.1 - Overview Components of outgoing TSs can be: • Locally built components: data components (Ethernet components for example), PSI/SI related components (resulting from local building and broadcasting of PATs for example), • Crossing components (components recovered from incoming TSs). A PID is allocated to each outgoing component, regardless of its type (standard components, EMMs, ECMs, PSI/SI related components, etc.). When a component is PSI/SI-related, the PID is set according to the standard (except for PMT PIDs). All outgoing PIDs can be set via the Management system (except crossing ECMs, i.e. ECMs relating to crossing services). PID management is performed independently for each outgoing TS. Several PIDs may be allocated to a built/crossing component according to the outgoing TS it is related to. 1.4.9.1.4.2 - Locally built components The maximum number of locally built components for all managed TSs is 75. Any locally built components can be added to one or more locally built or crossing services. There is no explicit component tag management for locally built components: the only way to associate a component tag with a locally built component is to add a stream identifier descriptor to that component.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

98

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

Locally built components can be set to ON_AIR or OFF_AIR. The impact on signalling tables is given in the following table: Component status

PMT component loop

Component

OFF AIR

Not declared

Absenta (*)

ON AIR

Declared

Present

a.Only if the component is not shared (a shared component can be set to OFF_AIR for a service and ON-AIR for another one)

PIDs of built components are always set via the Management system and are never automatically reallocated. 1.4.9.1.4.3 - Incoming and crossing components The maximum number of incoming components accepted for all managed TSs is 5000. The maximum number of crossing components for all managed TS is 2000 (shared component counts only for one component). For a given component of crossing service, component identification is either made on PID basis either on component tag basis. For a given crossing service, some components may be identified on PID basis and others on component tag basis. It is possible to: - stop all components of a crossing service except one or several components, - authorize transmission of all components of a crossing service except for one or more components, - authorize transmission of all components of a crossing service and edit some of these components. Any incoming component can be added to one or several locally built or crossing services. PIDs of crossing components are kept provided that they do not enter into conflict with components of higher priority and a PID change is not required via the Management system. Crossing component PIDs can always be edited via the Management system (except for ECMs). NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

99

1.4.9.1.4.4 - PID conflict management In the event of PID conflicts (different components in the same outgoing TS cannot have the same PID), PIDs are reallocated or not according to the component type as indicated in the following table: Component types Reallocation PSI/SI/PSIP component with PID fixed by no reallocation MPEG/DVB/ATSC standards related to locally built or downloaded table (not including PMT). PMT related to locally built services or PMT no reallocation related to explicitly crossing services with PMT PID explicitly designed from the management system. PMT related to crossing services not explicitly reallocation possible designed or PMT related to services explicitly designed without PMT PID explicitly designed from the management system. Built component (standard component/EMM). no reallocation Built ECM. reallocation possible Crossing component (standard component/EMM). reallocation possible (the automatic reallocation feature is available for the Operator in the NetProcessor Web Graphical User Interface)

Automatically allocated PIDs are not stored and the same allocation is not therefore guaranteed after a device reset. The first PID value used by the automatic reallocation mechanism is 33. The following PIDs values are then used if they are available. 1.4.9.1.4.5 - Ghost components Definition: A ghost component is a component which is not described in the signalling tables. Features: • Any incoming or locally built standard component can be broadcast as a ghost component.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

100

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

• The maximum number of locally built ghost components for all managed TS is 75 (locally built ghost components are considered as a sub-part of locally built components). • The maximum number of crossing ghost components for all managed TSs is 2000 (crossing ghost components are considered as a sub-part of crossing components). 1.4.9.1.4.6 - Shared components Definition: A component is shared if it is present in more than one service with the same PID. Features: • A component can be shared between several locally built services and several crossing services. • Service-related parameters (e.g. descriptors) of an incoming shared component are respected and kept in the outgoing stream. • If a component is shared by two services, it will be scrambled only if scrambling with the same access group is asked for both services. • The services that recover the shared component cannot be spliced or transrated. 1.4.9.1.4.7 - Duplicated components Definition: A component is duplicated if it is present in more than one service with different PID. Features: • A duplicated component requires an explicit PID remapping from the Operator. Without PID remapping, the component is not duplicated but is a shared component. • The component duplication is not possible inside a same service. 1.4.9.1.4.8 - Added components When adding a "non ghost incoming component", it is possible to indicate if related incoming signalling must be kept or not.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

101

1.4.9.1.5 - ECM management 1.4.9.1.5.1 - Locally built ECMs The maximum number of locally built ECMs is 1000. 1.4.9.1.5.2 - Incoming & crossing ECMs The maximum number of incoming ECMs acceptable for all managed TS is 2000. The maximum number of crossing ECMs for all managed TS is 500. An incoming ECM is transmitted as long as one component it is related to is transmitted. An incoming ECM is stopped when all the components it is related to are stopped. The Operator can remove incoming PMT and SDT CA_Descriptors (and corresponding ECMs/EMMs) according to CAS_ID values through the NetProcessor Web Graphical User Interface either globally for all input TS or individually for each input TS. 1.4.9.1.6 - EMM management 1.4.9.1.6.1 - Locally built EMMs The maximum number of locally built EMMs is 10. 1.4.9.1.6.2 - Incoming & crossing EMMs The maximum number of incoming EMMs acceptable for all managed TS is 200. The maximum number of crossing EMMs for all managed TS is 50. It is possible to: - stop all incoming EMMs except for one or more EMMs, - authorize transmission of all incoming EMMs except for one or more EMMs, - authorize transmission of all incoming EMMs and edit some of these EMMs.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

102

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

When a crossing EMM is explicitly defined, the EMM PID can be edited. The Operator can remove incoming PMT and SDT CA_Descriptors (and corresponding ECMs/EMMs) according to CAS_ID values through the NetProcessor Web Graphical User Interface either globally for all input TS or individually for each input TS. 1.4.9.1.7 - PCR management Incoming PCR can be carried by a standard component but cannot be carried by a non standard component (i.e. a ghost component). Incoming PCR can be shared by several services. In the event of PID remapping for the component carrying the PCR, PMT PCR PID field will be updated. In the event of PMT PCR PID remapping, component PID will be updated. If the component carrying the PCR is stopped, then the PMT PCR PID field is set to 0x1FFFF.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

103

1.4.9.2 - Multiplexing For each output TS, the multiplexed components are: • unfiltered components of incoming TSs according to the cross-connection orders set by the Operator via the Management system, • external data (opportunistic or not) injected by the Ethernet ports, • internal signalling data, • stuffing packets. For each output TS, the output bitrate, which is set by the Operator via the Management system, must be compatible with the total output component bitrates. When the output bitrate is higher than the useful bitrate, stuffing (or null) packets are regularly sent to make up the useful bitrate and reach the output bitrate. In the case of opportunistic data injection, the null packets are replaced by opportunistic data packets injected via the Ethernet data interface from an external data server. Multiplexing fills 98% of the channel for inputs corresponding to the model defined by ISO 13818-1. This percentage is lower if the inputs are in bursts. 100% filling is possible if the sum of the output multiplex’s constituent service bitrates is equal to the channel bitrate defined for the output and one component of this multiplex is an opportunistic data flow.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

104

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.9.3 - Bitrate management with Automatic Component Filtering policy SI/PSI processing option (N903SS1PAA) is required for this feature. 1.4.9.3.1 - Overview The aim of the bitrate management feature is to define groups of elements (which can be TS, services or components), to regularly check the bitrate of these groups and stop components if the defined group exceeds the defined maximum bitrate. As soon as an element has been identified in order to reduce its bitrate, components are chosen inside this element according to Automatic Component Filtering policy (see section “Automatic Component Filtering policy”, page 104). Component broadcasting may be restarted when the group bitrate do not exceed anymore the defined maximum bitrate. There can be two kinds of groups: • Rate policy survey group If a rate policy group exceeds its maximum bitrate, Automatic Component Filtering is performed among elements which exceed their maximum bitrate as long as group bitrate exceeds its maximum bitrate. • Priority policy survey group If a priority policy group exceeds its maximum bitrate, Automatic Component Filtering is performed among elements of lowest priority as long as group bitrate exceeds its maximum bitrate. Groups cannot be heterogeneous (element are necessarily of the same type). If the bitrate of a group is under the defined minimum bitrate, an alarm is raised until the bitrate of the group exceeds the minimum bitrate of the group. 1.4.9.3.2 - Automatic Component Filtering policy Automatic Component Filtering policy inside elements depends on the type of elements: • If tributary, components will be filtered according to their PID value (components of lowest PID will be filtered first).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

105

• If service, lowest priority components will be filtered as long as the group bitrate is not below the group_maximum_bitrate; the priorities assigned to the components depend on their stream types and are given in the following table: Components

Default priorities

PCR components

200

Shared video components

180

Non shared video components

160

Shared audio components

140

Non shared audio components

120

Shared components (other than video and audio)

100

Other components

80

The lowest priority is 0. • If component, the concerned component will be filtered (the element is composed of only one component) as long as the group bitrate is not below the group_maximum_bitrate; The choice of the components to restore depends on the type of element and group dropping policy: • if elements are tributaries, - if the group dropping policy is priority policy, the equipment will try to reactivate the component of highest PID value of the highest priority tributary concerned by Automatic Component Filtering policy; - otherwise the equipment will try to reactivate the component of highest PID value of the first tributary (of the group) concerned by the Automatic Component Filtering policy. • if elements are services, - if the group dropping policy is priority policy the equipment will try to reactivate the highest priority component of the highest priority service concerned by the Automatic Component Filtering policy; - otherwise the equipment will try to reactivate the highest priority component of the first service (of the group) concerned by the Automatic Component Filtering policy.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

106

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

• if elements are components, - if the group dropping policy is priority policy, the equipment will try to reactivate the highest priority component concerned by the Automatic Component Filtering policy; - otherwise the equipment will try to reactivate the first component (of the group) concerned by Automatic Component Filtering policy. The maximum number of groups and maximum number of elements is 100. Checking frequency is 1 second.

1.4.9.4 - Multiplexer overflow management This feature is not an option. It applies to not video processed TS only (i-e without splicing and without rate shaping). In order to prevent overflow, priority is assigned to outgoing services (including EMMs). In the event of overflow, lower priority services will be filtered first. All outputs can be independently configured. Three levels of priority can be assigned: Premium (highest priority), High (default priority), Normal.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

107

1.4.9.5 - Output processing 1.4.9.5.1 - PCR and LTW information processing All the incoming packets carrying a PCR (Program Clock Reference) field are sampled by a NetProcessor local time reference (F=27 MHz) with 1 ppm accuracy. The packets leaving NetProcessor and carrying a PCR have their PCR field corrected with a delay to take into account the transit time of these packets in the Multiplexer. The same applies to packets containing an LTW (Legal Time Window) field. The remultiplexing strategy is chosen “early”. These operations are rendered necessary by signalling filtering and recomposition, as the transit time of these packets in NetProcessor is not constant. This PCR correction ensures that a PCR going through NetProcessor will undergo a jitter increase of +/- 75 ns max. 1.4.9.5.2 - Outgoing signalling management 1.4.9.5.2.1 - Overview ¤ External and internal carousels NetProcessor offers several ways to deliver the SI/PSI tables in the output transport streams, from the simple pass-through of ghost components, to the more elaborated injection of tables by mean of programmable filters. Depending on the retained method, the table can be repeated internally (internal carousel) or not (external carousel). • Basic methods to inject SI/PSI tables from an external carousel (typically SI/PSI generator). There are 2 ways to inject SI/PSI tables from an external carousel. They may be: - TS ghost injected (i-e externally injected as ghost component through ASI/ATM/Gigabit Ethernet interfaces). A common way to inject tables in a Multiplexer is to prepare them externally and provide them in a Transport Stream at the input of the device. Then, the tables are simply passed through for each output Transport Stream, and the PID are changed according to the desired or standardized values. In such a case, NetProcessor will just route the corresponding MPEG packets from the input to the output and it will not change anything in the table content. The outputs of NetProcessor have to be configured in "No signalling" mode in order to avoid any conflict between externally and 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

108

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

internally built tables. It is worth noting that this solution relies on an external carousel: if the SI/PSI stream disappears, the output tables disappear as well. Therefore, this solution is principally recommended with redundant SI/PSI generators. - DVB-Simulcrypt injection over Ethernet. This case is very close to the previous one. Here, the SI/PSI tables are injected using DVB-Simulcrypt protocol over Ethernet, and they feed the NetProcessor on its 10/100BT Data port. The only difference with the previous case lies in the way the tables are supplied to the Multiplexer: TCP/IP over Ethernet requires less bandwidth than a TS stream (stuffing is not required). Nevertheless, the basic principle remains the same: the tables are seen by the Multiplexer as "ghost" components and their repetition rate has to be maintained externally. • Methods to supply SI/PSI tables to a NetProcessor internal carousel. There are 4 ways to supply SI/PSI tables to a NetProcessor internal carousel. They may be: - Automatic rebuilding of SI/PSI tables This method is recommended when there is no external SI/PSI generator. The idea is to use the incoming signaling information to build automatically the outgoing tables (ISO or DVB). A typical case is turnaround channels which arrive from satellite reception and are part of a new bouquet, for instance on Cable network. NetProcessor can extract the tables from the input streams which contain the related programs that are multiplexed. These tables are rebuilt according to the change that can be applied on service name, PID values, TS Id, etc. It is important to note that only "actual" tables (SDT, EIT P/F, EIT Schedule, etc.) can be processed this way. NetProcessor eliminates all the information related to stopped services and keeps only what is necessary. Original descriptors on components are kept and new private descriptors can be added in the PMT from the GUI. The "locally built SI/PSI" mode is particularly recommended whenever regular signaling information is required at the output (ISO or DVB "Actual" tables only) and incoming streams contain enough information to build these tables. In other words, when EIT Actual is required at the output, the input streams shall contain consistent EIT tables (otherwise, the output EIT table is empty); - Table downloading from a file (NIT actual, BAT and TOT only) NetProcessor is provided with a signalling table Editor (SigEditor) which can be used to define the content of NIT actual, BAT and TOT tables. This

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

109

tool provides a user-friendly graphical interface representing the table structures with the possibility to modify or add each field and descriptor (selected in a popup menu). Once the table ready, it is possible to save it in a file and to download the file into the NetProcessor. This mode does not require any specific option and it is recommended whenever the content of a table is stable and cannot be rebuilt from input signalling. NIT table is a typical example. - Table downloading through PSIG/PITG protocol Another way to load tables directly in the carousel is to supply them to the data port of NetProcessor (IP 10/100BT) by using the PSIG or PITG protocol. Tables are not modified by NetProcessor (except the version number if required by the Operator). There are many advantages compared to downloading from file: - Table content can be updated in real time, - A larger choice of tables can be managed through this mode, - Repetition rate of tables can be set through the protocol; On the other hand, this solution involves having a SI/PSI generator able to support the PSIG or PITG protocol. This mode of injecting the tables offers a good trade-off between price and performance since it is part of the basic configuration. It allows the management of many tables including optional DVB tables like "SDT Other" or "EIT Other". In addition, it does not demand to allocate a dedicated transport stream input as it relies on a standard data port. - Table filtering through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option Thanks to the "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option, NetProcessor provides a powerful way of filtering and changing the tables extracted from any input. These tables are then broadcast from the internal carousel at its own pace. For each table or sub-table, a filter is created and the selection is performed according to different input parameters (specific for each kind of table). The output parameters are automatically filled in with incoming values, although it is also possible to edit them (except for the output PID value fixed by the standard). Before being broadcast, following fields of table may be modified through the management system: PID, table id, table id ext1, table id ext2 and table id ext3 depending on the table as indicated below:

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

110

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

Mux input

PID IN

TID IN SID IN

TSID ONID NID BID IN IN IN IN

PID OUT

TID OUT

PAT

0

0

0

CAT

1

1

1

PMT

2

NIT a

40, 41

10

40

NITo

40, 41

10

41

SDTa

42, 46

11

42

SDTo

42, 46

11

46

BAT

4A

11

4A

EITp/f a

4E-6F

12

4E

EITp/fo

4E-6F

12

4F

EITs a

4E-6F

12

50-5F

EITs o

4E-6F

12

60-6F

TOT

73

14

73

SID TSID ONID NID BID OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT

2

Can be modified Cannot be modified except authorized value(s) ("x, y" stands for discrete values while "x-y" stands for a range of discrete values) Not significant

The following examples give an idea of the various capabilities offered by the feature: - All the signalling information is supplied from a single SI/PSI generator to one input of NetProcessor. » Each output table can be selected through the use of filters; » PID remapping and allocation can be applied to each output TS; » If the signalling input disappears, the latest version of each table is still broadcast. For the Customer, there is a lower or no need to back-up the SI/PSI generator. - Several tables (for example SDT) are carried on an unique PID at the input » One SDT related to one transport stream (TS Id, ON Id) can be selected. This SDT actual can be remapped to PID 17 at the output and converted from SDT actual to SDT other. For the Customer, there is or no need of external editor or generator to perform advanced table manipulation. NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

111

- In content distribution architecture, the SI/PSI tables are built centrally and sent in a dedicated transport stream that is used to deliver the tables to each local operator. » Region-specific tables can be selected in each local Head-End. For the Customer, only one centralized SI/PSI generator is required instead of one per region or local Head-End. It is worth noting that this mode (table filtering) can be combined with other modes like ghost pass-through or table internally rebuilt. ¤ Priority in case of conflict Conflict can occur on tables/subtables which must be provided on the output (a table/subtable can be filtered through downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol and downloaded from a file for example). In order to resolve conflict, priorities are defined. The general priority rule is as follows (from higher to lower): • downloaded through PSIP/PITG protocol; • filtered through "advanced SI/PSI processing" option; • locally built. For the NIT, BAT and TOT tables, the priority rule is as follows (from higher to lower) : • downloaded through PSIP/PITG protocol; • filtered through "advanced SI/PSI processing" option or downloaded from a file according to the latest NetProcessor Web configuration. • locally built for NIT only. In case of conflict, tables/subtables of higher priority are broadcast and tables/sub tables of lower priority are not broadcast but kept in the equipment in order to be broadcast in case of higher priority table disappearance. Tables/subtables cannot be broadcast if corresponding PID is not available.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

112

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

¤ Table broadcasting Tables are transformed into packets and then broadcast. When a table is broadcast based on the internal carousel the repetition rate is either set by the management system for the tables which are locally built or filtered through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option or downloaded, or provided with the table for the tables which are downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol. The broadcasting repetition rate for ISO/DVB/ATSC tables is configurable for each output from 100 ms to 300 s in 10 ms steps for all tables except TOT and TDT tables whose broadcast repetition can be set from 1 s to 300 s in 1 s steps.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

113

1.4.9.5.2.2 - PSI/SI table processing (MPEG/DVB standard) All output TS can be independently configured. Output configuration is dynamically taken into account (no reboot is needed). The fact that tables can be processed independently of each other provides great flexibility and enables the following: - One outgoing TS can be configured in ISO mode; - Another outgoing TS can be configured in DVB mode; - The NIT actual can be recovered from an input (and sent to an output as a data component), independently of the broadcasting of other tables (in a CUSTOM mode close to DVB mode for example); - The NIT actual can be downloaded from a file and saved in a CUSTOM mode close to ISO mode for example; - TS filtered through "advanced SI/PSI processing" option can be remapped for PID change or TS ID extension change (current/next for example) in CUSTOM mode; - Some tables may be locally built, others may be TS injected through ASI, ATM or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, others may be injected using DVB-Simulcrypt protocol, others may be Ethernet injected through 100Base-T CMD2 data injection interfaces using PSIG or PITG protocols, others may be downloaded from a file, others may be TS ghost injected. When a table is TS ghost injected (i-e not using the NetProcessor internal carousel), corresponding PID is reserved and cannot be reused by internally processed tables. When a table is internally processed (i-e using the NetProcessor internal carousel), corresponding PID cannot be reused for TS ghost injected but can be reused for other internally processed subtables. A table cannot be TS ghost injected nor internally processed if corresponding PID is not available. ¤ PAT Management PAT may be locally built OR filtered through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option OR filtered through downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol. PAT cannot be broadcast if PID 0 is not available. If PAT is broadcast, PID 0 is reserved. If PAT is locally built and PID 0 available, empty PAT is built and broadcast at equipment start up.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

114

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

If PAT is locally built from transmitted (and possibly modified) input services and locally built services, an explicit parameter indicates if NIT has to be referenced in PAT or not, and services are sorted according to the ascending order of service_ID. ¤ CAT Management CAT may be locally built OR filtered through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option OR downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol. CAT cannot be broadcast if PID 1 is not available. If CAT is broadcast, PID 1 is reserved. If CAT is locally built and PID 1 available, empty CAT is built and broadcast at equipment start up. If CAT building is required, CAT table is built from transmitted input EMMs and locally built EMMs. ¤ PMT Management PMT may be locally built OR filtered through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option OR downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol. PMT cannot be broadcast if PMT PID is set by Operator and corresponding PID is not available. If PMT table is broadcast, corresponding PID is reserved. When a local PMT is built, • a PMT is built for each outgoing service; • several PMTs of a same output can share the same PID; • if the service is locally built, all types of descriptors can be included at the first or second PMT loop level (even private descriptors); • if the service is recovered from an input, outgoing PMT is built according to original PMT and equipment configuration; • CA descriptor may be automatically added (resp. removed) from PMT in case of scrambling; • the maximum number of components described in the PMT is limited by the PMT size (1024): all components of a service may not appear in PMT if the maximum size is reached (in that case, no alarm will be set).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

115

Without the SI/PSI processing option N903SS1PAA, component are ordered in PMT according to following principles: 1. If explicit order is configured by Operator, corresponding PIDs are listed first. Non explicitly configured PIDs are listed after explicitly configured PIDs and ordered according to principle 3. 2. If no explicit order is given and if related service is a crossing service, PMT original order is kept, added component (if any) are listed after original components and ordered according to principle 3. 3. Otherwise components are listed according to the following principles: - Based on stream type value: Video are listed first, then audio, teletext,(stream type has to be detailed). - In case of multiple components of the same stream type, components with the same stream type are listed on PID increasing order basis. The priority value of stream_type is defined in the table below:. Priority

Stream type value

Stream type enum

1

0x01

VIDEO_MPEG1

2

0x02

VIDEO_MPEG2

3

0x1B

VIDEO_AVC_H.264

4

0x03

AUDIO_MPEG1

5

0x04

AUDIO_MPEG2

6

0x06

AUDIO_AC3_DVB

7

0x0F

AUDIO_AAC_ADTS

8

0x81

AUDIO_AC3_ATSC

9

0x87

AUDIO_ENHANCED_AC3

10

0x11

AUDIO_AAC

11

0x06

TELETEXT_MPEG2

12

Other values

For stream_type 0x06, a search is performed in the AC3_DESCRIPTOR descriptor to find out whether it is private data or AUDIO_AC3_DVB. With the SI/PSI processing option N903SS1PAA, the Operator can set the component order in the PMT according to his/her own criteria through the NetProcessor Web Graphical User Interface. 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

116

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

¤ SDT Management SDT may be locally built OR filtered through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option OR downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol. SDT cannot be broadcast if PID 17 is not available. If SDT is broadcast, PID 17 is reserved. If SDT is locally built and PID 17 available, empty SDT is built and broadcast at equipment start up. When a local SDT is built • SDT is locally built from transmitted (and possibly modified) input services and locally built services; • in case of local scrambling, free_CA_mode field will be updated; • Running_status field is updated according to incoming value (case of incoming service) or configured value (the configured value has priority on the incoming value); • the EIT_present_following_flag is set to 1 if EIT_present_following is broadcast. In all other cases, it will be set to 0; • the EIT_schedule_flag is set to 1 if EIT_ schedule is broadcast. In all other cases, it will be set to 0; • when SDT is locally built, service descriptor is present in outgoing SDT if one of the following conditions is respected: - Service descriptor is present in incoming SDT; - Service descriptor is absent in incoming SDT but the Operator wants to set service name, provider name or service type. In the second case, fields wich are not set by the Operator are set to default values (defaut value for service name/provider name is "", default value for service type is 0x00). • Services are sorted according to the ascending order of service_ID. ¤ EITactual Management In this section, the term "EITactual" applies to EITactual p/f and EITactual schedule. Otherwise the type of EIT is indicated. EITactual p/f, EITactual schedule, independently from each other, may be locally built OR filtered through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option OR downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol. NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

117

EIT cannot be broadcast if PID 18 is not available. If EIT is broadcast, PID 18 is reserved. When EIT p/f is locally built, empty EIT p/f are built and broadcast at startup of equipment (then, they can be replaced by incoming EITs). EIT tables related to incoming but not transmitted services are ignored if EIT are locally built. Free_CA_mode field of EIT which are not locally built is not updated according to the scrambling state of the service or one of its components. Transport_stream_ID and original_network_ID fields of locally built EIT is updated according to equipment configuration. The service_ID field of the locally built EIT is updated according to equipment configuration (in the event of a service_ID change, for example). A fallback mode is implemented when the EIT p/f information related to an incoming service is lost, allowing the locally built EIT p/f to be deduced from the currently stored EIT schedule information (update period for EIT p/f is set to 1 second). ¤ EITother Management In this section, the term "EITother" applies to EITother p/f and EITother schedule. Otherwise the type of EIT is indicated. EITother p/f, EITother schedule, independently from each other, may be filtered through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option OR downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol. EIT cannot be broadcast if PID 18 is not available. If EIT is broadcast, PID 18 is reserved. A fallback mode is implemented when the EIT p/f information related to an incoming service is lost, allowing the locally built EIT p/f to be deduced from the currently stored EIT schedule information (update period for EIT p/f is set to 1 second). ¤ RST Management RST may be filtered through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option OR downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol. RST cannot be broadcast if PID 19 is not available. If RST is broadcast, PID 19 is reserved.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

118

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

¤ BAT Management BAT may be filtered through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option OR downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol OR downloaded from a file. BAT cannot be broadcast if PID 17 is not available. If SDT is broadcast, PID 17 is reserved. BAT actual downloaded through the management system may content as many sections as authorized in standard (255) in the limit of a maximum BAT size of 4096 bytes. ¤ ST Management ST may be downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol. ST cannot be broadcast if corresponding PID is not available. If ST is broadcast, corresponding PID is reserved. ¤ TDT Management TDT may be locally built OR downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol. TDT cannot be broadcast if PID 20 is not available. If TDT is broadcast, PID 20 is reserved. If TDT is locally built and PID 20 available, TDT including equipment UTC time is broadcast. Incoming TDT can be used to update equipment internal clock. ¤ TOT Management TOT may be locally built OR filtered through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option OR downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol OR downloaded from a file. TOT cannot be broadcast if PID 20 is not available. If TOT is broadcast, PID 20 is reserved. If TOT is downloaded and PID 20 available, TOT including equipment UTC time is broadcast. If TOT is locally built and PID 20 available, default TOT including equipment UTC time is broadcast. Incoming TOT can be used to update equipment internal clock. TOT downloaded through the management system must content only one section and must not exceed 4096 bytes.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

119

¤ TSDT Management TSDT may be downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol. TSDT cannot be broadcast if PID 2 is not available. If TSDT is broadcast, PID 2 is reserved. ¤ NITactual Management NIT may be locally built OR filtered through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option OR downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol OR downloaded from a file. NIT cannot be broadcast if PID 16 is not available. If NIT is broadcast, PID 16 is reserved. NIT actual downloaded through the management system may content as many sections as authorized in standard (255) in the limit of a maximum NIT size of 4096 bytes. If NIT is locally built and PID 16 available, default NIT is broadcast (Network ID is set to Original Network ID). ¤ NITother Management NIT other may be filtered through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option OR downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol. NIT other cannot be broadcast if PID 16 is not available. If NIT other is broadcast, PID 16 is reserved. ¤ SDTother Management SDT other may be filtered through "Advanced SI/PSI processing" option OR downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol. SDT other cannot be broadcast if PID 17 is not available. If SDT other is broadcast, PID 17 is reserved. ¤ Private table Management Private tables may be downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol. Private tables cannot be broadcast if corresponding PID is not available. If Private tables are broadcast, corresponding PID is reserved.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

120

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.9.5.2.3 - PSI/PSIP table processing (ATSC standard) ¤ Overview The environment is as follows:

Figure 1.36: ATSC-PSIP table injection from the PEARL ATSC server

NetProcessor (re)multiplexes MPEG-2 streams (e.g. MPEG-2 streams from an encoding pool) and provides only one MPEG2-ATSC stream (the other independant TS supplied by NetProcessor are ISO compliant). NetProcessor broadcasts all injected ATSC-PSIP subtables from the PEARL ATSC server. NetProcessor also provides: • PSI/PSIP reconciliation: NetProcessor guarantees the information contained in the PSI & the PSIP remains consistent: - according to its subtable processing configuration, NetProcessor duplicates the descriptor from EIT-0 to the relative PMT, - NetProcessor refreshes the Service_location_descriptor according to the PMT content;

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

121

• PSIP protection: NetProcessor ensures that the main PSIP information is constantly built even in the event of PEARL server failure, by storing all injected subtables from PEARL into its internal memory and performing a EPG shift every 3 hours; • ATSC monitoring: NetProcessor displays the output stream hierarchy and shows PMT & VCT syntax. PEARL sends NetProcessor the following ATSC-PSIP subtables: • MGT, STT, RRT, T-VCT, C-VCT, Channel ETT, EIT, DET, Event ETT, Data ETT, DCCT & DCCSCT.

Figure 1.37: ATSC-PSIP tables received and managed by NetProcessor

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

122

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

¤ MPEG-PSI subtable management

CATV (Cable)

DTT (Terrestrial)

Descriptor handling for Built PMT

NetProcessor 9030 or 9030/40

PAT, CAT and PMT are normally processed (refer to page 113, page 114 and page 114) with an additional feature for the built PMT: according to its subtable processing configuration, NetProcessor duplicates the descriptor from EIT-0 to the relative PMT as indicated below:

Dyn

Req

Dup

0xAA - Redistribution Control Descriptor: If flag “copy Dyn from current event” is enabled, and if PMT does not already include it, then the Redistribution Control Descriptor is got in the current event description (from EIT-0) and added in PMT.

Req

Req

At the Program_info_loop 0x05 - Registration Descriptor: If PMT does not already Conf include it, then a default Registration Descriptor is added. The ATSC format identifier: 0x47413934 (GA94) is used. 0x10 - Smoothing Buffer Descriptor: If PMT does not Conf already include it, then a default Smoothing Buffer Descriptor is added with SB_Leak_Rate=48481, SB_Size=2048 (see A/53). 0x87 - Content Advisory Descriptor: If flag “copy from current event” is enabled, and if PMT does not already include it, then the Content Advisory Descriptor is got in he current event descriptor (from EIT-0) and added in PMT.

0xB6 - Content Identifier Descriptor: If flag “copy from current event” is enabled, and if PMT does not already include it, then the Content Identifier Descriptor is got in the current event description (from EIT-0) and added in PMT. Note: The content_advisory_descriptor() is present in the descriptor loop immediately following the program_info_length field in the TS_program_map_section().

Dyn

All others: All other descriptors are unchanged.

Dyn/ Conf

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

Dup

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

123

For each ES_info_loop 0x05 - Registration Descriptor: For each AC-3 Audio Conf elementary stream, if ES_info_loop does not already include it, a default Registration descriptor is added with the AC3 AUDIO format identifier: 0x.... (AC-3) 0x06 - Data Stream Alignment Descriptor: For each Conf Video elementary stream (11172_VIDEO, 13818_VIDEO & 14496_2_VIDEO), if ES_info_loop does not already include it then a default Data Stream Alignment Descriptor is added in ES_info_loop with 2 for alignment_type. (See A/53). 0x81 - AC-3 Audio Descriptor: For each AC-3 Audio elementary stream, if flag “copy from current event” is enabled, and if ES_info_loop does not already include it, then the relative AC-3 Audio Descriptor is got in the current event description (from EIT-0) and added in ES_info_loop.

Dyn

Req

Req

0x86 - Caption Service Descriptor: For each Video elementary stream (11172_VIDEO, 13818_VIDEO & 14496_2_VIDEO), if flag “copy from current event” is enabled, and if ES_info_loop does not already include it, then the Caption Service Descriptor is got in the current event description (from EIT-0) and added in ES_info_loop.

Dyn

Req

Dup

/

Req

Req

0xA3 - Component Name Descriptor: Nothing is done. All others: All other descriptors are unchanged.

Dyn/ Conf

• Dyn: Dynamically added if flag "copy from current event" is enabled, and if PMT does not already include this descriptor. • Conf: Added if defined in NetProcessor configuration. • Req: Required, when used, some descriptors will be in each PMT. • Dup: Duplicated, some descriptors may also be present in the PMT as a second location. The first location is the EIT-0.

Note that all injected PMTs (e.g. from PEARL) transit NetProcessor unchanged.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

124

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

¤ ATSC-PSIP subtable management All ATSC-PSIP subtables are injected from PEARL. They are handled as "downloaded through PSIG/PITG protocol" subtables (refer to section “Outgoing signalling management”, page 107). MGT management

The MGT is injected from PEARL. This table can be internally updated to take into account a VCT update or an EPG shift. NetProcessor handles the MGT version number. C-VCT & T-CVT management

C-VCT & T-VCT tables are injected from PEARL. These subtables are dynamically rebuilt to update Service_location_descriptors as follows: for each crossing channel, if the relative PMT is not injected from PEARL, the Service_location_descriptor is rebuilt to take into account remultiplexed components. For channels described in VCT but not remultiplexed, the descriptors are unchanged. NetProcessor handles the VCT version number. RRT, DCCT, DCCSCT, ETT Channel

These subtables are broadcast unchanged. The PEARL Server handles the RRT, DCCT, DCCSCT & ETT Channel version numbers. Program Guide management

The Program Guide is a set of the following tables: EIT, DET, Event ETT, and Data ETT. All these subtables are broadcast unchanged. The PEARL Server handles EIT, DET, Event ETT, and Data ETT version numbers. The EPG shift occurs every 3 hours (at 0:00, 3:00, 6:00, 9:00, 12:00, 15:00, 18:00 and 21:00 UTC time). The EPG shift is managed by the PEARL Server. In the event of PEARL failure, the EPG shift is handled by NetProcessor. Then, for subtables relative to the program guide, NetProcessor: - stops broadcasting the deprecated EPG subtables, - shifts "table_type" fields in MGT (e.g. EIT k becomes EIT k-1), - resets repetition rates. NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

125

STT

The STT can be used to synchronize the equipment system clock. The STT is always synchronized with the equipment system clock prior to broadcast.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

126

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.9.6 - Scrambling NetProcessor offers 2 scrambling operation modes: • "External SCS" operating based on the XMS-XMU system; • "Internal SCS" operating for standalone NetProcessors. The two scrambling operation modes cannot be enabled simultaneously. 1.4.9.6.1 - External SCS mode The "external SCS mode" is enabled if 1 to N N903SSCXAA option codes or the N903SSC3AA option code are installed and no CAS dedicated options are installed. A typical configuration is given in the following diagram:

Figure 1.38: Typical configuration of external SCS mode

• NetProcessor handles multiplexing and scrambling functions; • The XMU Management Unit provides an interface with the ECM-G of one or more CAS systems; • The XMS 3500 Management System is used to set the scrambling configuration.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

127

Scrambling is possible at different levels: - Output TS level: all components of all programs in a specified output TS will be scrambled; - Program level: all components of the specified program will be scrambled; - Component level: the specified component will be scrambled. Managed CA Systems include BetaCrypt, Conax, Cryptoworks, Irdeto, Mediaguard, Nagra (WS + GR), NDS and Viaccess.

Note on "TS always clear" parameter This feature allows a NetProcessor that is managed by the XMS management system to generate 2 multiplexes with the same TS_ID / ON_ID. The first multiplex is scrambled, while the second one remains unscrambled. The "TS always clear" parameter attached to the multiplexes in the Web Graphical User Interface must be set to disabled for the scrambled multiplex and enabled for the unscrambled multiplex. The output TS signalling is coherent with the “TS always clear” mode (no “CA_descriptor” in PMT, “free_CA_mode” flag not set in SDT).

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

128

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.9.6.2 - Internal SCS mode NetProcessor is able to offer a scrambling solution without XMS/XMU by providing a direct interface to the ECM-G. The Embedded SCS in NetProcessor aims to be used for small systems with 1+1 or no redundancy. This product release cannot be used to manage a (1+1) redundant configuration of NetProcessor interfaced with one or more ECM-Gs. As a result, in such configuration, receivers may need one to two crypto-periods to retrieve the new control word and be able to descramble. A typical configuration is the following:

Figure 1.39: Typical configuration of internal SCS mode

It is not possible to have simultaneously an external SCS (simulcrypt synchronizer in XMU) and an embedded SCS.

ECM-G interface management is DVB Simulcrypt compliant. The internal SCS mode is running only if at least one "CAS dedicated option" is installed. The "CAS dedicated options" are defined in the following table:

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

N903SMEDAA N903SNAGAA N903SNDSAA N903SGENAA N903S1RDAA N903SC0NAA N903SCRYAA N903SV1AAA N903SFKSAA

129

Optional interface to Mediaguard EMMG and ECMG Optional interface to Nagra EMMG and ECMG Optional interface to NDS EMMG and ECMG Optional interface to generic EMMG and ECMG Optional interface to Irdeto/M-Crypt EMMG and ECMG Optional interface to Conax EMMG and ECMG Optional interface to Cryptoworks EMMG and ECMG Optional interface to Viaccess EMMG and ECMG Option to allow Fixed Key Scrambling.

Irdeto, Conax, NDS, Viaccess, Fixed Key are available with the current product release. Other CAS will soon be available. Fixed Key scrambling mode is also supported. Three modes are managed: Fixed Key CAS, BISS-1 and BISS-E. When the "Embedded SCS" is used, scrambling using several CAS is allowed if the Simulcrypt Scrambling Option is installed: N903SS1MAA

Simulcrypt scrambling option

In internal SCS mode, all scrambling functions are handled by the NetProcessor and the scrambling configuration is set by the Operator through the NetProcessor Web Graphical User Interface. Connection to the ECM-G is DVB Simulcrypt compliant. The DVB Simulcrypt interface (ECM/CW and EMM) is handled by the same Ethernet connector as the one used for data injection (CMD2). Up to 10 ECM-G can be connected to a NetProcessor. Scrambling is possible at different levels: - Output TS level: all components of all programs in a specified output TS will be scrambled; - Program level: all components of the specified program will be scrambled; - Component level: the specified component will be scrambled.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

130

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.9.7 - SFN Adaptation 1.4.9.7.1 - Single Frequency Network and SFN Adapter overview A single-frequency network (SFN) is a broadcast network where several transmitters simultaneously send the same signal over the same frequency channel. The aim of SFNs is the optimization of the radio spectrum, allowing a higher number of radio and TV programs in comparison to traditional MFN transmission.

Figure 1.40: SFN architecture with NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40

According to the SFN principle, the transmitters and receivers of a SFN have to be synchronized with the others using a reference clock. In the case of DVB-T, the DVB forum specifies (TS 101 191) the use of a special marker, the Mega-frame Initialization Packet (MIP) that is inserted in a group of data called mega-frame at a central distribution point. The MIP signals the SFN transmitters the absolute time at which this point in the data stream is to be broadcast. The construction of the mega-frame and the insertion of the MIP at the central distribution center are done by the SFN adapter. The input of the SFN adapter is a re-multiplexed stream. The number of TS-packet of a mega-frame depends of the modulation parameters of the transmission. The MIP can be inserted anywhere within the mega-frame but synchronized to the PPS and 10 MHz signals supplied by an external GPS receiver (for instance, the following model can be used: http://www.spectracomcorp.com/ProductsServices/TimingSynchronization/GPSTi meFrequencyReferences/EC20SEpsilonGPSClock/tabid/1310/Default.aspx).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

131

1.4.9.7.2 - NetProcessor implementation NetProcessor provides the SFN Adapter function on up to 4 output transport streams. One SFN option (N903SSFNAA) has to be ordered per adapted output TS. The hierarchical mode of DVB-T is supported. The SFN option requires the NetProcessor to be equipped with the N903ASB0GB board ("4 ASI In + 4 ASI Out + GPS In" optional board) or N903ASB4GA board ("10 ASI In/Out + GPS In + GPI I/O" board). When two NetProcessors are used in 1+1 configuration, it is possible to synchronize the MIP insertion by configuring them as clients of a NTP server. This avoids downstream desynchronization of the COFDM modulator when NetProcessors are switched using a "smart" switch (like Amethyst III or NetProcessor 9010) which preserves the megaframe structure. When the NetProcessor outputs are switched using a regular ASI router, the MIP synchronization reduces the perturbations (occurence and impact) at the modulator input but it does not totally prevent them. Region A

GPS clock Main NetProcessor

GPS clock

ASI

NTP Server

Network Adaptation Network Adaptation

GPS clock

ASI

GPS clock

Automatic Input TS Switch NetProcessor 9010

Back-Up NetProcessor National / Regional Services SFN Transmission

Network Contribution

Network Adaptation

Figure 1.41: Synchronizing the MIP insertion

Although NetProcessor allows to duplicate the same output over several ports, this is a "logical" duplication and not an "electrical" duplication. This means that the MPEG content is the same in each duplicated stream but the packet positions may vary from one port to another. As a result, it is not recommended to use the internal duplication for SFN output streams. Should a SFN stream be replicated, it is better to use an external ASI distributor.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

132

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.9.8 - Data Injection 1.4.9.8.1 - Physical interfaces NetProcessor provides two 100Base-T links, named CMD 1 and CMD 2. Although the Ethernet operating supervision (Control, Monitor and Diagnostics) and data injection traffic can be mixed on the same link, it is advisable to use separate links for the external data injection interface and supervision, so as not to saturate the operating link. By convention, CMD 1 is used for supervision and CMD 2 for data injection. 1. CMD1 and CMD2 should belong to distinct subnets: the network part of the IP1 and IP2 addresses must be different. 2. The maximum data injection bitrate is 10 Mbps (including all channels of any protocol).

1.4.9.8.2 - Supervision Each managed data channel is uniquely identified (in the whole system) by a field called Unified_channel_id (automatically allocated). Additional parameters may be used to identify data channels (e.g. the client id/data id combination which uniquely identifies an EMM/private data stream in a whole system). Some messages (commands) are received from supervision to create, modify or delete data channels. Additional parameters may be used, for example: - Maximum data injection bitrate for a given data channel. An alarm is raised if the data injection bitrate exceeds the defined maximum data injection bitrate; - Minimum data injection bitrate for a given data channel. An alarm is raised if this rate is not observed; - In the case of EMMG/PDG data injection, several outputs can be selected per unified channel id, except for opportunistic data injection which is mono output. One output can be one ASI output or one ATM channel or one IP stream. It is possible to select a different PID per output.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

133

1.4.9.8.2.1 - Protocols Data is managed and collected according to several protocols.

AC

MUX DVB Simulcrypt interfaces

SIMF Agent

A C G

MUX and PDG

ECMG ECMG EMMG

EMMs1

SIMF Agent

¤ EMMG

ECMG ECMG PDG

Private Data1

CSIG CSIG CPSIG CPSIG CPSIG CSIG

CPSI2

CSI2

SIMF Agent

SIMF Agent

SIMF Agent

E I S

Mux Redundancy Notification

PSIG

PSI Tables3

SIMF Agent

NMS

SIG

SI Tables3

SCG

ECMs

SIMF Agent

ECMs

SCS

ECMG ECMG ECMG

CW

CW AC

Note 1: EMMG MUX Note 2: C(P)SIG (P)SIG Note 3: (P)SIG MUX = AC CPSIG = CWG = = EIS NMS = PSIG = = SIG

CW

Access Criteria Custom Program Specific Info Generator Control Word Generator Event Information System Network Management System Program Specific Information Generator Service Information Generator

M U X

Scrambler

Monitoring & Control

MUXCONFIG

ACG = CSIG = ECMG = EMMG = PDG = SCG = SIMF =

Access Criteria Generator Custom Service Information Generator Entitlement Control Message Generator Entitlement Management Message Generator Private Data Generator Scrambling Control Group Simulcrypt Integrated Management Framework

CWG Defined in this specification Proprietary; not defined Simulcrypt CA components Host head-end components Network Management System

Figure 1.42: Head-End Implementation of DVB SimulCrypt (ETSI TS 103 197)

Data injection is compliant with chapter 6 of document ETSI TS 103 197 "Digital Video Broadcasting: Head-End Implementation of DVB SimulCrypt V1.4.1" ("EMMG MUX and PDG MUX interfaces"). Protocol version 1, 2 and 3 are supported (v4 does not exist for this interface). Specific UDP only mode (without any TCP connection for control) is not standardized but is supported by the DBX 4300 Broadmux and usually used by Thomson Video Networks clients. This mode is also supported by NetProcessor for compatibility reasons. 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

134

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

The EMMG/PDG data injection block is able to manage up to 170 data channels, 170 data streams and a maximum of 10 streams per channel. A maximum of 189 sockets can be used. One stream can have up to 8 outputs with the possibility of one PID per output (except for opportunistic data injection which is mono output). One output can be one ASI output or one ATM channel or one IP stream. The TCP connection port used for EMMG/PDG based injection is set by the Operator via the Management system (32000 by default). ¤ P(SIG)

MUX interface

Data injection is compliant (except for explicitly authorized non compliances) with chapter 9 of document ETSI TS 103 197 "Digital Video Broadcasting: Head-End Implementation of DVB SimulCrypt V1.4.1". The (P)SIG MUX interface model with the carousel built in the (P)SIG is not implemented (interface_mode_configuration value is always set to 0x00). The (P)SIG MUX data injection block is able to manage up to 32 channels, 64 streams per channel using a maximum of 33 sockets (32 channels + 1 demon). The TCP connection port used for (P)SIG based injection is set by the Operator via the Management system (34000 by default). ¤ PITG

MUX interface

Data injection is compliant with the PITG

MUX v1.0 interface.

The PITG MUX data injection block is able to manage up to 32 channels, 64 streams per channel using a maximum of 33 sockets (32 channels + 1 demon). The TCP connection port used for PITG based injection is set by the Operator via the Management system (33000 by default).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

135

1.4.9.8.2.2 - Multiplexing and Opportunistic Data mechanism Once received, data is sent for multiplexing processing. Multiplexing involves the Opportunistic Data mechanism. The dynamic nature of digital video, inherent to MPEG encoding, creates residual bandwidth or null packets in a DTV transmission. As a result, valuable bandwidth that could be used for sending data is wasted. Filtering null packets and other unwanted program elements at input creates available space in the output transport stream. This free (unused) bandwidth is ideal for carrying IP data which can be sent on an opportunistic (space available) basis.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

136

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.9.9 - Subtitle insertion For each subtitle language, the Operator will configure NetProcessor to generate an (empty) data component (the PIDs of the built components must correspond to the PIDs of the subtitles inserted by the subtitle inserter). These components are added to the service in the Multiplexer so that the PMTs/SDTs can be updated by NetProcessor. Component descriptors are added to the PMT. The subtitle inserter is synchronized with the PCR of the NetProcessor output TS.

Figure 1.43: Subtitle insertion

This feature only applies to streams which are not spliced and not transrated.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

137

1.4.10 - Video processing (available with NetProcessor 9030/40 model only) 1.4.10.1 - Splicing

Only NetProcessor 9030/40 model with one or two NetRater boards can support this feature.

1.4.10.1.1 - Overview The Seamless Splicing feature is used for local switching-to-replacing and switching-to-regular operations without artifacts. It can replace one service by another one while keeping the same Service_ID and the same PIDs in the output TS. Splicing is particularly useful for regional switchover or Ad insertion. By combining the service duplication and the splicing capabilities, it is possible to create N regional versions of an incoming national program. Each copy of the incoming program can be made splicable and the goal of course is to insert a different content in each of them. The output regional programs can be delivered in a single MPTS.

SVT Reg1 SPL SVT Nat

Built services

SVT Reg2 SPL SVT Regn SPL

Reg1 Reg2 Regn

Figure 1.44: Splicing built services

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

138

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.10.1.2 - Features NetProcessor 9030/40, with one embedded NetRater board, can apply splicing on up to 32 SD programs (MPEG-2 or MPEG-4) or 16 HD programs (MPEG-2 or MPEG-4). With 2 NetRater boards, these values are doubled. These values can be limited by a software option setting (refer to section “Ordering guide”, page 11). The Seamless Splicing function assumes that the streams to be spliced are not scrambled and that the national program is CBR or VBR. The local program can be a VBR or a CBR SPTS. It should have the same standard and the same level and profile as the national program. The managed standards are: SD MPEG-2 (MP@ML), SD MPEG-4 (MP@L4), HD MPEG-2 (MP@HL) and HD MPEG-4 (MP@L4). The components (video, audio) to be spliced are automatically selected according to their stream types. Both switching-to-replacing and switching-to-regular operations occur on PTS timing as follows: • leave a program before anchor (I, P frame); • join a program before anchor (I frame). Switching-to-replacing might be controlled by In-Band commands (SCTE 35) generated from a remote Encoder and received on a NetProcessor input TS. Another possibility is to trigger the switching on out-of-band events: GPI or SCTE 30 commands.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

139

1.4.10.1.3 - Examples of application 1.4.10.1.3.1 - Ad Insertion In this application, splicing is controlled via SCTE 35 In-Band commands (digital cue-tones).

Figure 1.45: SCTE 35 In-Band commands generated from a remote Encoder and received on a NetProcessor input TS

In the Master Head-End: 1. GPIs received from the automation system or analog cue tones signal the moment at which the splice must be performed, a few seconds in advance; 2. Splice information is sent to the Encoder responsible for compressing the national program according to SCTE 104; 3. The Encoder generates SCTE 35 tables (also called digital cue tones). The tables contain all the instructions required for program splicing. In addition, the Encoder may format the video stream by inserting I frames at splice points ("Splicer friendly encoding"). In the Regional Head-End: 4. The tables are received and interpreted by the Splicer; 5. The Splicer communicates with the insertion server to receive the local stream for splicing according to SCTE30; 6. At the moment indicated in the SCTE 35 table, the Splicer performs replacing.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

140

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.10.1.3.2 - Live-to-Live splicing Switching-to-replacing and Switching-to-regular can be controlled • by a GPI generated locally as illustrated below.

Figure 1.46: Live-to-Live splicing using GPI generated locally

For each insertion channel, splicing must be enabled by the Operator through the Web Graphical User Interface

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

141

• via SCTE 35 In-Band commands as discussed previously for Ad Insertion application. This case is illustrated below.

Figure 1.47: Live-to-Live splicing using SCTE 35 In-Band commands

The SCTE 35 In-Band commands used for switching-to-replacing and switching-to-regular are present in the national TS generally (but sometimes in the regional TS or another TS). 1.4.10.1.4 - Splicing features With the current product release, splicing features are given below: • SD input rate must be lower than 8Mb/s, HD input rate must be lower than 12.5Mb/s1; • For GPI splicing, up to ten IO Com servers with 12 buttons are managed (W&T Web-IO #57630); • Splicing cannot be performed on services including several video components; • Splicing cannot be performed on primary (national) and secondary (regional) services if they are scrambled.

1. It will be increased to 19Mbps in a near future. 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

142

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

• Splicing can involve 1 video, up to 4 audio components, and data or teletext components. - The number of audio components may be different in the primary and secondary streams. - The algorithm used for the audio component matching is as follows: for each audio component of the primary service, it will be looked for the following audio component in the secondary service: - an audio component of the same type with the same language, - otherwise, a compatible audio component1 with the same language, - otherwise, an audio component of the same type, - otherwise, a compatible audio component; If no such audio component is found in the secondary service, the audio component of the primary service will be stopped. - For data and teletext, the Operator may choose through the Web Graphical User Interface whether the data or teletext component of the primary service will be stopped or kept (transmitted) after splicing. • When a stream is currently spliced, a new splice cannot be applied to a third input (no cascaded splice); • Splicing cannot be performed on service with a shared component (except if the shared component carries the PCR only). • You are recommended to splice primary and secondary components of the same type (same standard, same resolution,...) as decoders behavior cannot be predicted when splicing is performed between components of different types. Some decoders can bring artefacts like mosaic, freeze,... when changing their setting (as examples: change of video resolution, change of audio sampling frequency,...).

1. The compatible audio components are: MPEG-1 ⇔ MPEG-2, AC3 2.0 ⇔ AC3 5.1 NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

143

Overall splicing specifications (performances and restrictions) are summarized in the following table: SPLICING FEATURES MPEG-2 SD Splice Minimum input bit rate (Mbit/s) Max service input bit rate (Mbit/s) Profiles & levels

0,5 8 MP@ML 422P@ML

MPEG-4 SD Splice Minimum input bit rate (Mbit/s) Max service input bit rate (Mbit/s) Profiles & levels

0,5 8 ML up to P4.0

B hierarchical pictures support

N

MPEG-2 HD Splice Minimum input bit rate (Mbit/s) Max service input bit rate (Mbit/s)

Profiles & levels

0,5 12.5 in this release. It will be increased to 19Mbps in a near future. MP@HL

MPEG-4 HD Splice Minimum input bit rate (Mbit/s)

0,5

Max service input bit rate (Mbit/s)

12,5

Profiles & levels

MP@ML

B hierarchical pictures support

N

Video (general) Splice only between same type of video (Standard, Profile, Level)

Y

Splice out frame

Before I or P

Splice in frame

Before I

Maximum number of video components to be spliced

1

Primary channel can contain several video components

N

Support of 3:2 pulldown

Y

Default Maximum GOP duration

1000 ms

Configurable Maximum GOP duration

3000 ms

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

144

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

Audio MPEG1 layer 2

Y

AC3 Audio standards (including 5.1)

Y

AAC LC

Y

AAC HE

Y

Number of audio components in primary and secondary channels may be different

Y

Maximum number of audio components to be spliced

4

Same audio type required for primary and secondary channels

Y

Splice between AC3 5.1 and AC3 2.0 allowed

Y

Splice between MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 allowed

Y

SCTE35 SCTE35 support (extraction & processing of Tables)

Y

Local switchover or "Live" to "Live" splicing

Y

Standard version

2007

Splice_insert minimum preroll Splice insert command

4 sec splice_event_id splice_event_cancel_indicator program splice mode component splice mode splice_immediate

Y N Y Y Y

SCTE30 (DPI Splicing API) Standard version

2006

Splice request minimum preroll (3 sec in standard)

3 sec

Insertion channel preroll (min/max)

300 / 600

Max number of simultaneous API connection

250

Splice request queue size per service

10

Service level splice

Y

Component level splice

Y

Time based splice

Y

Back-to-back splice (prior session use)

N

Postblack support

N

Abort

Y

Support of Splice immediate command

Y

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

Supported Multiplex Type

145

0:ASI 3:IPV4 1 port 6:IPV4 n ports

GPI triggering Max number of GPI I/O (12 per GPI Box) GPI Splicing mimimum preroll

120 < 2 sec

Configuration Component matching

Auto

Miscellaneaous PTS based splice timing

Y

Streams with 1 PTS per GOP are spliceable

Y

Cascaded splice

N

Shared PCR component supported

Y

DigiCipher streams supported with manual PID remapping

Y

DigiCipher streams supported with auto PID remapping

Y

Splicing of built services

Y

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

146

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.10.2 - Rate shaping

Only NetProcessor 9030/40 model with one or two NetRater boards can support this feature.

1.4.10.2.1 - Overview Rate Shaping is a key feature for a reMultiplexer when building new bouquets from existing content. Rate Shaping is also particularly useful for IPTV applications where the output bandwidth is limited by the DSL line. NetProcessor 9030/40 accepts CBR or VBR input services and delivers capped VBR output services or VBR services with statistical multiplexing. The input and output services must be of the same type (MPEG-2 SD or MPEG-2 HD). 1.4.10.2.2 - Features 1.4.10.2.2.1 - Main features • NetProcessor 9030/40, with one embedded NetRater board, can apply Rate shaping on: - up to 64 MPEG-2 SD (if the input bitrate is lower than 5 Mbps for each service), or - up to 32 MPEG-2 SD (if the input bitrate is lower than 10 Mbps for each service), or - up to 8 MPEG-2 HD. With 2 NetRater boards, these values are doubled. These values can be limited by a software option setting (refer to section “Ordering guide”, page 11); • Rate Shaping cannot be performed on services featuring several video components; • Rate Shaping cannot be performed on scrambled services; • Rate shaping parameters are set via the Management system.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

147

• Rate shaping is performed from CBR/VBR to Capped VBR (this type of Rate shaping is also called "Clamping") or from CBR/VBR to VBR with statistical multiplexing. These two modes are described below. 1.4.10.2.2.2 - CBR or VBR to CBR Rate shaping ("Capped VBR" or Clamping) Rate shaping is applied independently to each program to be rate shaped.

Figure 1.48: CBR or VBR to CBR Rate shaping ("Capped VBR")

"Capped VBR" Rate shaping can be applied to MPEG-2 SD and MPEG-2 HD programs.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

148

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.10.2.2.3 - CBR or VBR to VBR Rate Shaping with statistical multiplexing

Figure 1.49: Rate shaping to VBR and Statistical Multiplexing

Each output TS can be configured with a statistical multiplexing pool which can contain up to 64 rate shaped programs. Rate shaping with statistical multiplexing can be applied to MPEG-2 SD and MPEG-2 HD programs. ¤ Principle of operation The bitrate is allocated between the rate shapers in the same pool for each image. The pool’s overall bitrate is constant whereas the bitrate on each rate shaper output varies from image to image depending on the complexity of the images of each rate shaper in the pool and the quality level set by the Operator. ¤ Quality level For each program to be rate shaped in the pool, the Operator sets a quality level (values between 0 and 99). When created all pool services are allocated a quality NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

149

setting of 50. If the service appears degraded, the Operator can increase the quality setting for this service (a maximum value of 99 will produce an output service that is practically identical to the input service in terms of quality). Conversely, the Operator can reduce this setting to purposely reduce the quality of the given service or to favor the other services.

Quality

Figure 1.50: Quality level in a statmux pool

¤ Transparent mode Services can be defined as transparent in statistical multiplexing pool. It means that the service is not transrated at all but its bitrate is dynamically taken into account in the pool bitrate. Available bitrate in a pool is the pool bitrate minus transparent services bitrate. Any kind of service can be defined in transparent (such as audio, data, scrambled MPEG-4 SD, MPEG-4 HD services). There is no need of PCR component in the service. For services which cannot be transrated (not MPEG-2 SD and HD services), they can be added in pool only in transparent mode. Each service configured in transparent mode takes one MPEG-2 transrating licence and one MPEG-2 transrating capacity.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

150

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

Overall Rate shaping specifications (performances and restrictions) are summarized in the following table: TRANSRATING FEATURES MPEG-2 SD Transrating Max input service bit-rate (Mbit/s)

10 (32 t.) 5 (64 t.)

CBR input stream

Y

VBR input stream

Y

GOP Size (N/M max values) Profiles & levels 3:2 pulldown

45 / 4 MP@ML 422P@ML Y

MPEG-2 HD Transrating Max input service bit-rate (Mbit/s)

19,4

CBR input stream

Y

VBR input stream

Y

Profiles & levels

MP@HL

Video (general) Maximum number of video components transrated per service

1

Transrated service can contain several video components

N

Statmux Supported standard

MPEG-2 SD & HD

In a pool different standards or resolutions can be mixed

Y

Maximun number of transraters allowed in all statmux pools

64

Maximum number of statmux pools per output

1

Transparent service in a pool (means not transrated at all)

Y

A service out of the pool can be clamped

Y

Miscellaneaous Shared PCR component supported

Y

DigiCipher streams supported with manual PID remapping

Y

DigiCipher streams supported with auto PID remapping

Y

Transrating of built services

Y

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

151

1.4.11 - IP Flextream™ 1.4.11.1 - Overview The IP Flextream feature is used to perform statistical multiplexing of Thomson Video Networks video Encoders over LAN and WAN. The IP Flextream solution is compatible with the Thomson Video Networks NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, ViBE Encoder range including ViBE DP_ENC/AD_ENC/IP_ENC and EM1000/2000/3000 encoders, XMS/XMU eXtensible Management System.

Figure 1.51: IP Flextream architecture

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

152

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

The IP Flextream solution offers many advantages, including its ability to: • enable Operators to distribute Encoders belonging to the same statistical multiplexing pool at a central Head-End, or at remote sites; • eliminate high bitrate codecs, creating capital savings; • optimize overall compression performance compared to the use of an HDLC Flextream solution by avoiding cascading MPEG compression segments (backhaul plus Head-End); • use a video network that is IP, ATM, or ASI. The IP Flextream solution requires an IP connection to exchange bitrates at frame rates; • support a protocol that tolerates transmission errors; • fully support redundant architectures and automatic switchover to backup ViBE Encoders or NetProcessor units; • compatible with encoders supporting FEC to allow usage of IP networks with high error rates and high jitter.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

153

1.4.11.2 - Typical IP Flextream topology

Figure 1.52: IP Flextream example

A NetProcessor 9030 or NetProcessor 9030/40 manages one or several pool(s) of Encoders through IP networks using multicast addressing. NetProcessor receives complexity information from the Encoders along with their PCR PID, through the IP Flextream proxy. It analyses the complexities and incident PCR in the TS signal, computes encoder target bitrates and sends them back to all the Encoders of all the pools through their relevant Proxy. All the UDP/IP messages are exchanged in SSM mode or not (configurable) using multicast address groups sent over the Control and Command network.

1.4.11.3 - Specifications Please refer to the XMS 3500 User Manual. 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

154

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.12 - Performances 1.4.12.1 - Service processing Locally built services

NetProcessor 9030 V4.0 or NetProcessor 9030/40 V4.0

Number of locally built services

64

Number of locally built ECM channels

1000

Number of locally built EMM channels

10

Number of locally built componentsa

75

TS Number of input services

2000

Number of crossing services

400

Number of input components

5000

Number of crossing componentsb

2000

Number of input EMMs

200

Number of crossing EMMs

100

Number of input ECMs

2000

Number of crossing ECMs

1000

Signalling, ECM and Data Total number of signalling and ECM sections

10000

Total number of signalling and ECM packets

25000

a.Locally built components are either included in services (locally built or not) or ghost components. b.Input components which pass through are called crossing components. The max. number is 2000 based on 5 per service with 400 services.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

155

General Latency (ASI In to ASI Out) Output max. bitrate (shared between various outputs)

8566216E(01) September 2010

~ 2.5 s if splice only ~ 6.5 s in all other cases The overall output throughput is 520 Mbps including duplicated streams (duplicated streams can be video processed or not video processed) and the output throughput for streams requiring video processing is 360 Mbps. Refer to section “Output throughput”, page 81 for further description.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

156

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.4 - Device description

1.4.12.2 - Scrambling

Dimension / feature Max number of Scrambling Groups Max number of ECMs (Access Conditions)

Max number of output TS Max scrambled components (ES PID) DVB SimulCrypt Protocol version ECM format (section and/or TS packet) Delay_start management (through DVB/SC protocol) Cryptoperiod management (through DVB/SC protocol) Min / max (typical) Crypto-Period Min / max delay start Max ECM size (in TS packet) Min / max (default) ECM repetition rate Max number of EMMs Max number of ECMG ↔ SCS channels for internal SCS mode

NetProcessor 9030 V4.0 or NetProcessor 9030/40 V4.0 500 (globally and per output) Locally built = 1000 Incoming = 2000; Crossing = 1000; 32 per scrambling group. 128 1600 V1, V2 Both Yes yes 2 s / 120 s (10 s) 500 ms / 1 CP 2 kBytes (12 packets) 100 ms / 1 s (100 ms) Input = 200 ; Crossing = 100 10

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.5 - Description of the Management systems

157

1.5 - DESCRIPTION OF THE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

NetProcessor provides the following Configuration, Monitoring and Diagnostics access: • SNMP agent for alarm, statistics & monitoring collection, and alarm traps; • Web Interface for configuration management and current state browsing; • Command Line Interface accessible via a terminal port or Telnet for configuration and current state browsing and debugging; • XMS 3500 management system for monitoring. Monitoring of incoming services is limited to 100 services maximum per TS.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

158

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.5 - Description of the Management systems

CMD1 10/100Base-T Port NTP/TCP/IP NTP Server

NTP Client

Real Time Clock

SNMP/UDP/IP NMS

SNMP Agent

MIB

SNMP/UDP and HTTP/TCP/IP and TELNET/TCP/IP

XMS 3500

HTTP/TCP/IP Web Browser

Web Server

Manager Config.

FTP/TCP/IP FTP Server

FTP Client

Loader

TELNET/TCP/IP

Telnet Client

Hyperterminal

Command Line Interface (CLI)

NetProcessor RS232 over RJ45

Figure 1.53: Configuration, Monitoring and Diagnostics access

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.5 - Description of the Management systems

159

1.5.1 - SNMP agent 1.5.1.1 - Agent 1.5.1.1.1 - Protocol NetProcessor provides an SNMP interface based on SNMPv2c. 1.5.1.1.2 - Trap management NetProcessor can register up to 10 NMSs as trap receivers. The ability to set the managers' IP is provided by the MIB itself through the Trap destination address setting. Traps are raised for events such as alarms, Cold or Warm Starts and Configuration changes (used for redundancy managed by an NMS). The trap loss detection mechanism is provided by NetProcessor. If an NMS detects a trap loss, it can be re-synchronized by retrieving the active alarm list or any other information relating to traps.

1.5.1.2 - MIB The MIB is organized into three parts: • The standard MIB, which includes the MIB II system group. The SNMP agent manages the following variables under the MIB-II standard MIB (according to RFC1213): SysDescr, SysObjectId, SysUpTime, SysContact, SysName and SysLocation. • The Thomson Video Networks General MIB, which manages the following variables: a log of last events, the list of active alarms, Firmware identifier, Option identifier, Detected boards, Reboot command, Configuration commands (Save, Download, Apply) and Upgrade commands. • The Thomson Video Networks NFP MIB, which manages MPEG Services & Components Statistics & Monitoring variables based on ETR290.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

160

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.5 - Description of the Management systems

1.5.2 - Web Interface The protocol used to connect the Web Browser (Microsoft Internet Explorer release 7.0) to the Web Server hosted in NetProcessor is HTTP. JRE release 1.6_20 is required. Some information is accessible in read/write mode for configuration management: -

Static configuration (provisioning, interfaces, options), Multiplexing setting, Firmware download, Configuration file upload and application.

Some information is accessible in read only mode for monitoring purposes: - Alarms, statistics, monitoring and chassis identifier. This interface is not designed for operation but mainly for product configuration. The following screen shows the window used for service processing setup.

4 – Apply

(or Check or Save)

1 – Monitor all inputs

5 – See result

2 – Build each output TS 3 - Set the service processing and video processing for each output TS

6 – Monitor Alarms

Figure 1.54: Service processing window

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.5 - Description of the Management systems

161

1.5.3 - Command Line Interface (CLI) This interface is accessible either via the Ethernet link and Telnet if the IP address is known or via the serial link and the PC hyperterminal application if the IP address is unknown. Command Line Interface use is the same regardless of the access mode used. The Command Line Interface is used for IP address setting, Web server enabling/disabling and port number setting: these settings are public. The available CLI commands depend on the user group (operator or service authenticated by specific logins and passwords). They are listed below: Command

Description

hard

display hardware information

soft

display software information

viewpkg

check download progress

downpkg

download a new package

toggpkg

change active package

dftpsvr

display FTP client

sftpsvr

configure FTP client

result

check download progress

lsopt

list installed options

insopt

install a software option

rmopt

uninstall a software option

rinfo

SNMP: Get System info

winfo

SNMP: Set System info

operator user group

x x x x

RID: Display RID values

dallas

DALLAS: Get Dallas code

eqcod

read equipment code (seed)

cfgdens

configure Splicing and Transrating hardware

8566216E(01) September 2010

x x

x x x x x x x x x

clist/cadd/cdel/cread/ set/display SNMP settings csave gbb ENV: Get Broadmux behavior state ridisp

service user group

x x

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

162

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.5 - Description of the Management systems

cfgsppol dcliv

configure splicer policy in case of secondary channel failure while splicing display CLI version

gdigi

get the DigiCypher mode

sdigi

set the DigiCypher mode

dasiin

FLEXASI: Display Input ASI Number

sasiin

FLEXASI: Set Input ASI Number

ddate

display date and time

sdate

set date and time

reboot

reboot product

ipset1

set IP address for port CMD1

ipdisp1

display IP address for port CMD1

ipset2

set IP address for port CMD2

ipdisp2

display IP address for port CMD2

dtln

display telnet settings

stln

set telnet settings

user

change user group

exmfil

ECM/EMM filtering

atscmode

enable/disable ATSC mode

help

display command help

quit

quit the CLI

x x x

x x x

x x x x x x x x x x x x x (consult) x (edit) x x x x

There is no Web Graphical User Interface for this interface. Command lines are interactive (question/answer).

1.5.4 - XMS 3500 eXtensible Management System NetProcessor 9030 V4.0 and NetProcessor 9030/40 V4.0 are fully controlled by the Thomson Video Networks XMS 3500 eXtensible Management System (Configuration, Monitoring and Diagnostics) release 4.32.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.6 - Standard Compliance

163

1.6 - STANDARD COMPLIANCE

NetProcessor complies with the following standards:

ISO/IEC 13818-1 ETSI ETR 290

Information technology - Generic coding of moving pictures and associated audio information: Systems Measurement Guidelines for DVB systems

ETS300429

Interfaces for CATV/SMATV headends and similar professional equipment

EN 50083-9

Cabled distribution systems for television, sound and interactive multimedia signals Part 9: Interfaces for CATV/SMATV headends and similar professional equipment for DVB/MPEG-2 transport streams

IETF RFC 791

IP v4

IETF RFC 768

User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

IETF RFC 793

Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

IETF RFC 1889

Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP)

IETF RFC1065

Structure and identification of management information for TCP/IP-based internets – SNMP v1

IETF RFC1066

Management information base for network management of TCP/IP-based internets – SNMP v1

IETF RFC1067

A simple network management protocol – SNMP v1

IETF RFC1901

Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2

IETF RFC1908

Coexistence between Version 1 and Version 2 of the Internet-standard Network Management Framework

IETF RFC2616

Hypertext Transfer Protocol - HTTP/1.1

ITU-T J132 DVB/ETS 300814 ITU-T I363.1

8566216E(01) September 2010

Transport of MPEG-2 signals in SDH networks DVB interfaces to Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) networks B-ISDN ATM Adaptation Layer specification: Type 1 AAL

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

164

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.6 - Standard Compliance

ITU-T J83 Annex A

Digital Multi-programme systems for television, sound and data services for cable distribution

ITU-T G783

Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks

ITU-T G841

Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures

ITU-T G957

Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy

ITU-T G825

The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)

ITU-T G703

Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces

ITU-T G704

Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44 736 kbit/s hierarchical levels

ITU-T G804

ATM cell mapping into plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)

ITU-T G832

Transport of SDH elements on PDH networks – Frame and multiplexing structures

SMPTE 2022-1-2007

Forward Error Correction for Real-Time Video/Audio Transport Over IP Networks

SMPTE 2022-2-2007

Unidirectional Transport of Constant Bit Rate MPEG-2 Transport Streams on IP Networks

IETF 2004-07

RFC3550 "RTP, a transport for real time applications"

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.7 - General device Specifications

165

1.7 - GENERAL DEVICE SPECIFICATIONS

1.7.1 - Electrical specifications .

¤ Power supply

Built-in AC power supply for N903BMyzAA bundles (NetProcessor without redundancy) Power supply characteristics 100 - 240VAC (one range with no switching). 50 - 60Hz 1.9A - 1.3A

Mains voltage Mains type Max. input current (in normal mode) Inrush current Network connection Earthing arrangement

Isolation class Installation category Overcurrent protection

< 30A cold start up, 230V, < 5ms Type A device connected with a non-industrial CEI 60320 compliant plug. TN/TT For Norway and only for this country, this device can be connected to an earthing arrangement of IT type for a voltage, between phases, of 230V. I II Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset.

Additional power supply characteristics Efficiency 80% average at 230VAC Power factor (cos Φ) 0.98 Overheating protection Built-in Overload protection Built-in

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

166

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.7 - General device Specifications

Mains power supply for AC/AC N903BAyzAB or DC/AC N903BDyzAB bundles

Mains voltage Mains type Max. input current. (in normal mode) Max. input current. (in default mode) Inrush current Network connection Earthing arrangement

Isolation class Installation category Overcurrent protection Sales reference for the 2nd Power Supply in a AC/DC dual PS chassis Sales reference (spare)

Characteristics of each PSU 100 - 240 VAC (one range with no switching). 50 - 60 Hz 1.7 A - 0.7 A per PSU (with two PSUs operating in the same chassis). 3.4 A - 1.4 A for a single PSU in operation (if one PSU is faulty). < 15 A cold start up, 230 V per unit. Type A device connected by a non-industrial CEI 60320 compliant plug. TN/TT. For Norway and only for this country, this device can be connected to an earthing arrangement of IT type for a voltage between phases of 230 V. I II Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset. N900PS2AAA

N900SPACGx

Additional characteristics of each PSU Efficiency 75% to 82% according to the load Power factor (cos Φ) 95.4 minimum Overheating protection Built-in Overload protection Built-in Front panel signalling Green Power indicator: correct output voltage Red Fault indicator: • overheating; • absence of mains power; • absence of secondary voltages. Width 8TE Weight 0.8 kg

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.7 - General device Specifications

167

DC power supply for DC/DC or DC/AC N903BDyzAB bundles Characteristics of each PSU 48 VDC + 20% - 16%

Input voltage Current type Max. input current (in normal mode) Max. input current (in default mode) Inrush current Network connection Earthing arrangement Isolation class DC network Earthing standard Overcurrent protection

DC supply 3.35 A per PSU (with two PSUs operating in the same chassis). 6.75 A for a single PSU in operation (if one PSU is faulty). 12 A cold start up, 48 V per unit. Male/female 3-pin SubD connector. DCI system (DC return isolated) I ETS 300132-2, September 1996 ETS 300253 Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset.

Sales reference for the 2nd Power Supply in a DC/DC dual PS chassis Sales reference for spare

N900PS2DAA

N900SPDCGx

Additional characteristics of each PSU Efficiency 75% to 82% according to the load Overheating protection. Built-in Overload protection. Built-in Front panel signalling Green Power indicator: correct output voltage Red Fault indicator: • overheating; • absence of primary power; • absence of one of the secondary voltages. Width 8TE Weight

0.8 kg

¤ Power consumption Power Consumption for NetProcessor 9030/40 (fully equipped): 180 W

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

168

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.7 - General device Specifications

1.7.2 - Mechanical features ¤ Dimensions Device width

19"

Device height

1RU

Device depth

570 mm for N903BMyzAA bundles (+ 41 mm for front bezel); 580 mm for N903BAyzAB and N903BDyzAB bundles (+ 41 mm for front bezel)

Figure 1.55: NetProcessor 9030 dimensions (N903BMyzAA bundles)

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.7 - General device Specifications

169

AC + DC version DC + DC version AC + AC version

36,2

445

36,2

M4 screw for EMC ground

502 219

36

41

26

115,3

560

162,6 26

219

392,8

580

502

145,4

257,2

145,4

M4 screw for EMC ground

4,8 33,6

33,6 483

44,2

Figure 1.56: NetProcessor 9030/40 dimensions (N903BAyzAB and N903BDyzAB bundles)

¤ Weight NetProcessor 9030/40 fully equipped

10 kg

¤ Miscellaneous Boards are not pluggable.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

170

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.7 - General device Specifications

1.7.3 - Ventilation Built-in ventilation system (five fan units) Ventilation

Air circulated from left to right (as seen from front)

Ventilated air flow

50 m3/h

Air out

Air in

Figure 1.57: Ventilation

The following precautions should be observed when mounting the device in a standard 19” rack: • Position the device on "low profile" L-profiles (height of 10 mm reduced to 5 mm in the areas facing the air inlet and outlet). • Ensure the rack is well ventilated.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.7 - General device Specifications

171

1.7.4 - Environmental specifications ¤ CE labeling • Complies with European Directive 93/68/EEC (22/07/93). ¤ Safety specifications • Legislation Complies with European Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC. • Standards Complies with IEC 60950-1 (2001 First Edition). Complies with EN 60950-1 (2001 First Edition). UL 60950-1 (2003) and CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03 (2003) for Canada. Certified. ¤ Electromagnetic specifications • Legislation Complies with European Directive 2004/108/EC. • Standards Complies with EN 55022 A1 (2001), A2 (2003) and EN 61000-3-2 for emissions. Complies with EN 55024 A1 (2001) for immunity. Complies with FCC Part 15, Class A recommendations. Complies with VCCI, Class A recommendations:

¤ Climatic specifications • During operation Complies with ETS 300 019-1-3 (February 1992): • Environmental class 3.1; • Operation in temperature-controlled locations; 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

172

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.7 - General device Specifications

• + 5oC to + 45oC; • 85% humidity compliant with the climatogram featured in the standard. • During storage Complies with ETS 300 019-1-1 (February 1992): • Environmental class 1.2; • Storage in weather-protected, partly temperature-controlled locations; • - 25°C to + 70°C; • 95% humidity compliant with the climatogram featured in the standard. ¤ Transport specifications Complies with ETS 300 019-1-2 (February 1992): • Environmental class 2.2: "Careful transportation" for mechanical conditions; • - 25°C to + 70°C; • 85% humidity compliant with the climatogram featured in the standard. ¤ Vibration, shock and fall specifications Complies with ETS 300 019-1-2 (February 1992). ¤ Protection specifications • IP20 protection. ¤ Pollution specifications • No. 2 pollution.

1.7.5 - Reliability MTBF at 30°C: 50,000 hours

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.8 - EU declaration of conformity

173

1.8 - EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

174

Chapter 1 - Specifications 1.8 - EU declaration of conformity

BLANK PAGE

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up

175

Chapter 2 Installation and Start up 2.1 - NetProcessor mechanical features .................................................. 177 2.2 - Installation procedure........................................................................ 179 2.3 - Rack mounting ................................................................................... 2.3.1 - NetProcessor installation requirements ........................................ 2.3.2 - Ventilation restrictions................................................................... 2.3.3 - Cabling restrictions ....................................................................... 2.3.4 - EMC ground restrictions ............................................................... 2.3.5 - Power supply and protective ground restrictions ..........................

180 180 181 187 187 189

2.3.5.1 - Chassis models and their associated power supplies ................. 189 2.3.5.2 - Power supply cord(s) ................................................................... 190 2.3.5.2.1 - Cord(s) for AC mains power supply ............................................ 190 2.3.5.2.2 - Cord(s) for DC power supply ...................................................... 191

2.3.6 - Mechanical and Electrical Specifications...................................... 192 2.3.6.1 - Mechanical specifications ............................................................ 192 2.3.6.2 - Electrical specifications ................................................................ 194

2.4 - Power up ............................................................................................. 197 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface..... 2.5.1 - Accessing the Command Line Interface ....................................... 2.5.2 - Login and password...................................................................... 2.5.3 - Help .............................................................................................. 2.5.4 - Setting initial parameters .............................................................. 2.5.5 - Commands relating to IP parameters ...........................................

198 198 201 202 203 204

2.5.5.1 - Displaying IP parameters (ipdisp) ................................................ 204 2.5.5.2 - Editing IP parameters (ipset) ....................................................... 204

2.5.6 - Commands relating to the date and time...................................... 206 2.5.6.1 - Displaying the current date and time (ddate) ............................... 206 2.5.6.2 - Changing the date and time (sdate)............................................. 206

2.5.7 - Commands related to the number of ASI inputs for 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

176

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up

ASI FLEX board ................................................................................. 208 2.5.7.1 - Displaying the number of ASI inputs for ASI FLEX board (dasiin) 208 2.5.7.2 - Editing the number of ASI inputs for ASI FLEX board (sasiin) ..... 209

2.5.8 - Commands related to the NetRater board(s) ............................... 211 2.5.8.1 - Some words about NetRater board(s) preconfiguration for splicing and Rate shaping ........................................................................................ 211 2.5.8.2 - Editing NetRater board(s) preconfiguration for splicing and Rate shaping ................................................................................. 214

2.5.9 - Commands related to the splicing engines .................................. 216 2.5.9.1 - Editing the default output values of the splicing engines.............. 216 2.5.9.2 - Editing the splicer policy in case of secondary channel failure while splicing ........................................................................................................ 218

2.5.10 - Commands related to the ATSC mode ...................................... 220 2.5.11 - Commands related to the DigiCypher streams .......................... 222 2.5.11.1 - Displaying the DigiCypher mode ................................................ 222 2.5.11.2 - Editing the DigiCypher mode...................................................... 223

2.6 - Connecting the cables....................................................................... 2.6.1 - Connecting the cables to the main board ..................................... 2.6.2 - Connecting the cables to the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces ............ 2.6.3 - Connecting the cables to the ATM extension board..................... 2.6.4 - Connecting the cables to the ASI extension board ...................... 2.6.5 - Connecting the cables to the GPO board..................................... 2.6.6 - Connecting the cables to the DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End ...........

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

224 224 230 230 231 231 233

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.1 - NetProcessor mechanical features

177

2.1 - NETPROCESSOR MECHANICAL FEATURES

¤ Chassis types NetProcessor 9030 is a 1RU chassis which is available in one version only: • N903BMyzAA bundles with one built-in AC Power Supply. NetProcessor 9030/40 is a 1RU chassis which is available in the following versions: • N903BAyzAB bundles with two AC Power Supplies for redundancy. • N903BDyzAB bundles with two Power Supplies for redundancy. One DC Power Supply is included. The second Power Supply MUST BE ORDERED and chosen between DC and AC.

¤ Power Supply Units (PSU) There are three PSU models: • A built-in AC PSU model for N903BMyzAA bundles; • A pluggable N900SPACGx AC PSU model for N903BAyzAB and N903BDyzAB bundles; • A pluggable N900SPDCGx DC PSU model for N903BDyzAB bundles. Mixing the N900SPACGx and N900SPDCGx PSU models in the same chassis is authorised for N903BDyzAB bundles only (a foolproof system on the power supply boards and chassis prevents such combinations on other chassis models). In a redundant chassis the two PSUs share the overall chassis consumption in normal mode. If one PSU fails, the other will supply the whole chassis. ¤ Dimensions NetProcessor has the following dimensions: • Width: 19", • Height: 1RU, • Depth (including BNC): - 570 mm for N903BMyzAA bundles (+ 41 mm for front bezel); - 580 mm for N903BAyzAB and N903BDyzAB bundles (+ 41 mm for front bezel).

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

178

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.1 - NetProcessor mechanical features

See section Mechanical specifications, page 192 for more details. ¤ Air flow Cold air is taken in from the left and hot air is expelled to the right. Air out

Air in

Figure 2.1: Cooling air flow for NetProcessor

A build up of dust on the air inlet grill will cause the internal temperature to rise and will result in a deterioration in performance, reliability and service life of the device. You are advised to regularly clean the air inlet grill (at least once a year).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.2 - Installation procedure

179

2.2 - INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

The following steps are required for device installation and initial configuration: 1. Mounting the device in a rack; 2. Powering the device; 3. Entering the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface (IP parameters, Date/Time); 4. Connecting the device to the other devices; 5. Checking the LEDs.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

180

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

2.3 - RACK MOUNTING

Rack mounting is not mandatory for NetProcessor but the ventilation and safety requirements given in this section must be observed in all cases.

The chassis must not be fixed with its rack mounting ears only. If you intend to install it in a rack, L-profiles are required and you must observe the ventilation and safety instructions described in the following sections.

2.3.1 - NetProcessor installation requirements This section lists the principles to be observed and the steps to be taken when installing NetProcessor in a 19" rack. The following restrictions must be observed: Ventilation restrictions Cabling restrictions EMC ground restrictions Power supply and protective ground restrictions

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

page 181 page 187 page 187 page 189

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

181

2.3.2 - Ventilation restrictions Please note that product failure rates are increased by high temperatures. The following precautions should therefore be observed: • • • • • • •

Prevent hot air from one device being introduced into other devices; Ensure adequate distribution of air flows to the device intakes; Avoid the effects of natural convection between devices; Avoid hot/cold air short-circuits; Avoid transverse effects in coupled racks; Prevent hot air from accumulating in the rack; Check the air flows: the rack should ensure a sufficient supply of cold air and sufficient evacuation of hot air (according to the number of devices mounted in the rack and their corresponding air flows);

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

182

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

The following important requirements should be added to the general recommendations: • As the device does not feature an air filter, it must be installed in a room with low dust levels. The maximum density of dust in the air must not exceed 100µg/m3 and the maximum number of particles with a diameter greater than 1µm must not exceed 1 million/m3. To prevent the power supply from overheating, remember to regularly clean the rack filter (if there is one), according to the filter manufacturer’s recommendations, and also NetProcessor’s air inlet grill (at least once a year); • There must be enough room for a column of cold air to circulate on the left of the chassis and a column of hot air to circulate on the right of the chassis, from the bottom to the top of the rack. • Cut the L-profiles so as they do not exceed 4.8mm in height in the areas facing NetProcessor’s air inlet and outlet. This will prevent any hot air from accumulating in the device.

L-Profile

40mm 4.8mm depends on the rack depth

Cut the L-profiles so as they do not exceed 4.8mm in height in the areas facing NetProcessor’s air inlet and outlet

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

183

• Given its exact 1RU height, NetProcessor can be placed on top of another NetProcessor or other 1RU equipment without an L-profile. It is however advisable to observe the following restrictions: • If the rack is positioned on a pressurised floor, it is possible to stack NetProcessors or other 1RU equipment in groups of four, each group being separated from another group by a space of 1RU.

(however, maintenance operations are facilitated if these groups are limited to two NetProcessors or other 1RU equipment); • In the absence of a pressurised floor, limit the group size to two chassis. Failure to observe these installation requirements will directly result in a deterioration in performance, reliability and service life of equipment.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

184

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

Figure 2.2: First example: NetProcessor and other 1RU equipment on a pressurized floor & in a standard rack (front view)

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

185

Figure 2.3: First example : NetProcessor and other 1RU equipment on a pressurized floor & in a standard rack (side view)

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

186

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

Figure 2.4: Second example: NetProcessor and other 1RU equipment on a unpressurized floor & in a standard rack (front view)

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

187

2.3.3 - Cabling restrictions It is essential to separate the power supply cables from the signal cables. When facing the rear of the rack (as the device is connected via the rear panel), the power supply cables must be guided to the right of the chassis and the signal cables to the left.

2.3.4 - EMC ground restrictions The EMC connection is required to ensure ground equipotentiality between the different devices in the technical center (only one connection is required per device). Each chassis side panel features a tapped hole to connect an bonding strip. This bonding strip is fixed using an M4 screw whose length depends on the bonding strip type (no more than 8 mm of the screw must enter the chassis in relation to its outer edge). The bonding strip must have a 6 mm² cross-section and be shorter than 500 mm.

Figure 2.5: EMC connection

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

188

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

1. When mounting a chassis in the rack you are advised to observe the following points: • Screw the bonding strip onto the chassis before mounting the chassis in the rack. Then, screw the bonding strip onto the EMC DC bus. • Unscrew the bonding strip from the EMC DC bus before moving the chassis. Then unscrew the bonding strip from the chassis. 2. The rack EMC DC bus (to which the NetProcessor EMC strip is connected) must be connected to the rack ground pin. This pin is also connected to the safety ground. 3. EU Compliance note: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. 4. FCC Compliance note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. 5. Canadian EMC Compliance note: This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Thomson Video Networks can affect emission compliance and could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

189

2.3.5 - Power supply and protective ground restrictions 2.3.5.1 - Chassis models and their associated power supplies NetProcessor is a 1RU chassis which is available in the following versions: • N903BMyzAA bundles with one built-in AC Power Supply. • N903BAyzAB bundles with two AC Power Supplies for redundancy. • N903BDyzAB bundles with two Power Supplies for redundancy. One DC Power Supply is included. The second Power Supply MUST BE ORDERED and chosen between DC (N900PS2DAA) and AC (N900PS2AAA).

Figure 2.6: Chassis models and their associated power supply inlets

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

190

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

2.3.5.2 - Power supply cord(s) 2.3.5.2.1 - Cord(s) for AC mains power supply

1. Never supply a unit which is not in the chassis. 2. The built-in overload protection cannot be accessed or reset.

¤ Specifications The AC mains power cords are only shipped with the device if ordered. Otherwise, it is advisable to use mains cables with the following features: • Device end of cable: CEI 320 compliant connector; • Flexible wire: 3 x 1 mm2 cross-section or 18 AWG, 10 A minimum, 250 V compliant with the applicable standard or rules of the country where the device is installed; • Mains outlet end of cable: plug compliant with the applicable standard or rules of the country where the device is installed. ¤ Connecting AC mains power supply cord(s) Power supply end The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the country of installation. The connection panel must be positioned in the rack in such a way that the plug and power cord(s) are within easy reach for switching off purposes. For (each) mains inlet, the wiring system must feature overload and earth fault protection and a bipolar cut-off device or a differential circuit breaker. If in doubt, contact a qualified electrician. NetProcessor end Plug the power cord(s) into the mains inlet.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

191

2.3.5.2.2 - Cord(s) for DC power supply ¤ Specifications The DC power supply cable wires are coloured in accordance with the following codes: Pin layout

Terminals

Wire colour INTERNATIONAL (Cable Ref. 46131742)

A1: A2: protective earth A1

A2

A3

A3: +

BLUE GREEN/YELLOW BROWN

The earthing standard is DC/I with DC return isolated.

- must be linked to a cut-off device. + must be linked to the protective earth (safety ground) outside the device. The DC power source must be of SELV type (Secundary Electrical Low Voltage). It must be located in the same building as the device and the entire source circuit must be kept within the building. ¤ Connecting DC power supply cords Power supply end The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the country of installation. The connection panel must be positioned in the rack in such a way that the plug and power cords are within easy reach for switching off purposes. The wiring system must feature protection against overcurrents which accepts voltages of 48 VDC + 20% - 16% and supports inrush current when the device is plugged in. If in doubt, contact a qualified electrician. NetProcessor end Connect the two power cords into the DC power inlets.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

192

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

2.3.6 - Mechanical and Electrical Specifications 2.3.6.1 - Mechanical specifications ¤ Dimensions Device width

19"

Device height

1RU

Device depth (with BNC connectors)

570 mm for N903BMyzAA bundles and 580 mm for N903BAyzAB and N903BDyzAB bundles (+ 41 mm for front bezel).

Figure 2.7: NetProcessor 9030 dimensions (N903BMyzAA bundles) NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

193

AC + DC version DC + DC version AC + AC version

36,2

445

36,2

M4 screw for EMC ground

502 219

36

41

26

115,3

560

162,6 26

219

392,8

580

502

145,4

257,2

145,4

M4 screw for EMC ground

4,8 33,6

33,6 483

44,2

Figure 2.8: NetProcessor 9030/40 dimensions (N903BAyzAB and N903BDyzAB bundles)

¤ Weight NetProcessor 9030/40 full equipped

10 kg

¤ Ventilation Built-in ventilation system Ventilated air flow Delta T

8566216E(01) September 2010

50m3/h 13°C

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

194

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

2.3.6.2 - Electrical specifications ¤ Power supply Built-in AC power supply for N903BMyzAA bundles (NetProcessor without redundancy)

Mains voltage Mains type Max. input current (in normal mode) Inrush current Network connection Earthing arrangement

Isolation class Installation category Overcurrent protection

Power supply characteristics 100 - 240VAC (one range with no switching). 50 - 60Hz 1.9A - 1.3A < 30A cold start up, 230V, < 5ms Type A device connected with a non-industrial CEI 60320 compliant plug. TN/TT For Norway and only for this country, this device can be connected to an earthing arrangement of IT type for a voltage, between phases, of 230V. I II Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset.

Additional power supply characteristics Efficiency 80% average at 230VAC Power factor (cos Φ) 0.98 Overheating protection Built-in Overload protection Built-in

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

195

Mains power supply for AC/AC N903BAyzAB or DC/AC N903BDyzAB bundles

Mains voltage Mains type Max. input current. (in normal mode) Max. input current. (in default mode) Inrush current Network connection Earthing arrangement

Isolation class Installation category Overcurrent protection Sales reference for the 2nd Power Supply in a AC/DC dual PS chassis Sales reference (spare)

Characteristics of each PSU 100 - 240 VAC (one range with no switching). 50 - 60 Hz 1.7 A - 0.7 A per PSU (with two PSUs operating in the same chassis). 3.4 A - 1.4 A for a single PSU in operation (if one PSU is faulty). < 15 A cold start up, 230 V per unit. Type A device connected by a non-industrial CEI 60320 compliant plug. TN/TT. For Norway and only for this country, this device can be connected to an earthing arrangement of IT type for a voltage between phases of 230 V. I II Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset. N900PS2AAA

N900SPACGx

Additional characteristics of each PSU Efficiency 75% to 82% according to the load Power factor (cos Φ) 95.4 minimum Overheating protection Built-in Overload protection Built-in Front panel signalling Green Power indicator: correct output voltage Red Fault indicator: • overheating; • absence of mains power; • absence of secondary voltages. Width 8TE Weight 0.8 kg

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

196

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.3 - Rack mounting

DC power supply for DC/DC or DC/AC N903BDyzAB bundles

Input voltage

Characteristics of each PSU 48 VDC + 20% - 16%

Current type Max. input current (in normal mode) Max. input current (in default mode) Inrush current Network connection Earthing arrangement Isolation class DC network Earthing standard Overcurrent protection

DC supply 3.35 A per PSU (with two PSUs operating in the same chassis). 6.75 A for a single PSU in operation (if one PSU is faulty). 12 A cold start up, 48 V per unit. Male/female 3-pin SubD connector. DCI system (DC return isolated) I ETS 300132-2, September 1996 ETS 300253 Built-in protection, cannot be accessed or reset.

Sales reference for the 2nd Power Supply in a DC/DC dual PS chassis Sales reference for spare

N900PS2DAA

N900SPDCGx

Additional characteristics of each PSU Efficiency 75% to 82% according to the load Overheating protection. Built-in Overload protection. Built-in Front panel signalling Green Power indicator: correct output voltage Red Fault indicator: • overheating; • absence of primary power; • absence of one of the secondary voltages. Width 8TE Weight

0.8 kg

¤ Power consumption The maximum power required for a NetProcessor is 180W.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.4 - Power up

197

2.4 - POWER UP

Check that NetProcessor is not yet connected to the LAN as factory-set IP addresses may cause disturbance on the LAN when NetProcessor is switched on (address conflict).

Connect the power cord and switch on the device. The green POWER LED(s) will come on. After a start-up phase, the device will become operational. When the device is switched on, the last stored configuration will be active.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

198

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

2.5 - SETTING THE INITIAL PARAMETERS VIA THE COMMAND LINE INTERFACE

2.5.1 - Accessing the Command Line Interface In this section and those that follow, the Command Line Interface will be abbreviated by CLI. CLI can be accessed: • either via the Ethernet link and the PC Telnet application if the device IP address is known; • or via the serial link and the PC hyperterminal application (or any terminal emulator). CLI use is the same regardless of the access mode used. ¤ Accessing the CLI via the Ethernet link The CLI is accessed via the Telnet application installed on the PC. The NetProcessor IP address which is required for Telnet connection is the last entered value for the CMD1 interface. The factory set IP parameters given on the Acceptance Test Report shipped with the device are as follows: Factory set IP address for CMD1: 192.168.1.1 Factory set Netmask for CMD1: 255.255.255.0 Factory set Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0 As the NetProcessor CMD Ethernet interfaces host an autocrossover mechanism, you can use direct or crossed cable connection between the PC and NetProcessor. The Telnet application must be set up as follows: Terminal options

No local echo, Block cursor, no CR LF

Emulation

VT100 / ANSI

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

199

Set up the Telnet connection between the PC and NetProcessor;

A welcome page will be displayed. Go to section “Login and password”, page 201 to continue. ¤ Accessing the CLI via the serial link The CLI is accessed via a serial link between NetProcessor and a terminal or a PC emulating a terminal. 1. Connect the terminal (or the PC emulating a terminal) to the NetProcessor RJ45 connector via an RS232 to Ethernet adapter cable. - The RJ45 pinout on NetProcessor is: 8

1

- The RJ45-SubD9 female adapter cable wiring is: RJ45 on NetProcessor

3 4 5 6 1, 2, 7 and 8 not connected

8566216E(01) September 2010

SubD9 Female on PC N900RSRJAA RJ45/SubD9 cable

5 2 3 5

Gnd RxD TxD Gnd

1, 4, 6, 7, 8 and 9 not connected

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

200

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

2. Set up the terminal port as follows: 9600 bauds, 8 bits, no parity, 1 start, 1 stop, no flow control;

Figure 2.9: Terminal port setup for accessing the CLI

Click on OK to set up the connection between the PC and NetProcessor; A welcome page will be displayed.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

201

2.5.2 - Login and password The welcome page displayed after connection will request the user login and password. CLI has two predefined user groups: "service" and "operator". • The Service group is for Technicians who are responsible for installation. The Login and password are respectively: service and service. • The Operator group is for Users who are in charge of operation. The Login and password are respectively: operator and operator.

1. In the current release, you must proceed as follows to log in as service: • Log in as operator (with login and password: operator and operator); • Type user; • Answer service and service for login and password.

2. CLI is case sensitive (service is correct, Service is not correct).

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

202

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

2.5.3 - Help ¤ General Help To get the list of all available CLI commands (related to user rights) the Operator has to type help after the prompt. Two types of help are available: one for Service and one for Operator. Example: CLI.Operator> help

The CLI provides many commands. Some of these commands are not, however, intended for the device user but reserved for Thomson Video Networks use only. It is therefore important to only use the commands described in this manual so as not to disrupt device operation or jam the device, as this would require assistance from Thomson Video Networks Customer Services.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

203

2.5.4 - Setting initial parameters The following table lists the commands used to set the initial parameters. User operation Setting basic parameters

8566216E(01) September 2010

Associated commands

Section

ipdisp1, ipdisp2

“Displaying IP parameters (ipdisp)”, page 204

ipset1, ipset2

“Editing IP parameters (ipset)”, page 204

ddate

“Displaying the current date and time (ddate)”, page 206

sdate

“Changing the date and time (sdate)”, page 206

dasiin

“Displaying the number of ASI inputs for ASI FLEX board (dasiin)”, page 208

sasiin

“Editing the number of ASI inputs for ASI FLEX board (sasiin)”, page 209

cfgdens

“Editing NetRater board(s) preconfiguration for splicing and Rate shaping”, page 214

cfgspbr

“Editing the default output values of the splicing engines”, page 216

cfgsppol

“Editing the splicer policy in case of secondary channel failure while splicing”, page 218

atscmode

“Commands related to the ATSC mode”, page 220

rdigi

“Displaying the DigiCypher mode”, page 222

sdigi

“Editing the DigiCypher mode”, page 223

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

204

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

2.5.5 - Commands relating to IP parameters The procedure for setting IP parameters is the same for both CMD ports (CMD1 for Commands, Monitoring & Diagnostics and CMD2 for Data injection).

2.5.5.1 - Displaying IP parameters (ipdisp) (Applicable to NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 Login/Password: service/service or operator/operator) Two commands are available to display IP parameters for CMD1 and CMD2. To display the IP address for CMD1, type ipdisp1 after the prompt. To display the IP address for CMD2, type ipdisp2 after the prompt. Example:

Figure 2.10: Displaying IP parameters (ipdisp)

2.5.5.2 - Editing IP parameters (ipset) (Applicable to NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 Login/Password: service/service) Two commands are available to edit IP parameters for CMD1 and CMD2. ¤ CMD1 IP parameters To set the IP address for CMD1, proceed as follows: 1. Type ipset1 after the CLI.Service prompt; 2. Type the new IP address, gateway and netmask values for CMD1; 3. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters [Y]/[N(default)]? if you wish to confirm the new values or n if you wish to keep the previous values.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

205

Example:

Figure 2.11: Editing IP CMD1 parameters (ipset1)

4. Type y. As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device by typing reboot after the prompt.

Figure 2.12: Rebooting the device

5. Type y to confirm the reboot (or n if you want to cancel the reboot). ¤ CMD2 IP parameters To set the IP address for CMD2, type ipset2 and proceed as with ipset1.

Figure 2.13: Displaying and editing IP CMD2 parameters (ipdisp2 and ipset2)

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

206

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

2.5.6 - Commands relating to the date and time 2.5.6.1 - Displaying the current date and time (ddate) (Applicable to NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 Login/Password: service/service or operator/operator) To display the current date and time, type ddate after the prompt. The UTC date and time will be displayed. Example:

Figure 2.14: Displaying the current date and time (ddate)

2.5.6.2 - Changing the date and time (sdate) (Applicable to NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 Login/Password: service/service) To change the date and time, proceed as follows: 1. Type sdate after the CLI.Service prompt; 2. Type the new date and time values in month, day, hour, minute and year format (without spaces) after UTC time ?; 3. Type y after Apply date&time now? if you wish to confirm the new values or n if you wish to keep the previous values.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

207

Example:

Figure 2.15: Changing the current date and time (sdate)

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

208

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

2.5.7 - Commands related to the number of ASI inputs for ASI FLEX board The ASI FLEX board (N903ASB3Gx and N903ASB4Gx) supports 10 ASI ports which can be programmed individually as inputs or outputs via the CLI interface.

Boundary line is programmable N ASI inputs

ASI Flex board (N903ASB3GA)

(10-N) ASI outputs

Boundary line is programmable N ASI inputs (10-N) ASI outputs

ASI Flex board (N903ASB4GA)

Figure 2.16: Flexible ASI interface

2.5.7.1 - Displaying the number of ASI inputs for ASI FLEX board (dasiin) (Applicable to NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 Login/Password: service/service or operator/operator) To display the number of ASI inputs, type dasiin after the prompt. Example:

Figure 2.17: Displaying the number of ASI inputs for FLEX ASI board (dasiin)

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

209

2.5.7.2 - Editing the number of ASI inputs for ASI FLEX board (sasiin) (Applicable to NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 Login/Password: service/service) To set the number of ASI inputs, proceed as follows: 1. Type sasiin after the CLI.Service prompt. 2. Type the number of ASI inputs you require after INPUT_ASI_NUMBER. 3. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters? if you wish to confirm the new values or n if you wish to keep the previous values. Example:

Figure 2.18: Setting the number of ASI inputs for FLEX ASI board (ssasiin)

4. Type y. As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device by typing reboot after the prompt.

Figure 2.19: Rebooting the device

5. Type y to confirm the reboot (or n if you want to cancel the reboot).

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

210

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

After the reboot, the ASI connections will be cleared from your current configuration. Check your ASI cabling before reactivation of your ASI IO to avoid signal conflicts and rebuild the device configuration.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

211

2.5.8 - Commands related to the NetRater board(s) (Applicable to NetProcessor 9030/40 fitted with 1 or 2 NetRater board(s) Login/Password: service/service) NetProcessor 9030/40 is scalable. It offers the possibility for a customer to start with a MPEG Multiplexer/reMultiplexer and to add the video processing capability only when required. The video processing is carried out by one NetRater board in charge of performing Splicing and Rate shaping. A second board can be added to double the Splicing and Rate shaping capabilities.

2.5.8.1 - Some words about NetRater board(s) preconfiguration for splicing and Rate shaping NetProcessor 9030/40 needs to be preconfigured in term of Splicing and Rate shaping to optimize the resource allocation of the NetRater board(s). This preconfiguration is performed through the CLI using the command cfgdens You have to set the number of Splicing and Rate shaping required for your application (without exceeding the capacity of the NetRater board(s)). For this purpose, you must know the global resource of a NetRater board and the resource consumed by each Splicing and Rate shaping feature: • The global resource of a NetRater board is 64 units of processing. This global capacity is fully available for Splicing only or Rate Shaping only. When both Splicing and Rate Shaping are used simultaneously, the NetRater board capacity is divided by two: 32 units for Splicing and 32 units for Rate Shaping. A NetRater board is supplied in the basic configuration with 16 Rate Shaping licenses. Additional options have to be purchased to extend the number of Rate Shaping licenses or to add Splicing capabilities.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

212

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

• The consumption of each each Splicing and Rate shaping feature is given in the following table: Feature

Consumption (in units of processing)

Max. Number for one NetRater board (see Note a)

1 splice SD (MPEG-2 or MPEG-4)

2

32 max on one board (as 64 units of processing maximum are available for Splicing only)

1 splice HD (MPEG-2 or MPEG-4)

4

16 max on one board (as 64 units of processing maximum are available for Splicing only)

1 transrate MPEG-2 SD (input bitrate < 5 Mbit/s) (see Note b)

1

64 max on one board (as 64 units of processing maximum are available for Rate Shaping only)

1 transrate MPEG-2 SD (input bitrate >= 5 Mbit/s) (see Note b)

2

32 max on one board (as 64 units of processing maximum are available for Rate Shaping only)

1 transrate MPEG-2 HD

8

8 max on one board (as 64 units of processing maximum are available for Rate Shaping only)

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

213

a) Maximum number values are divided by two when Splicing and Rate shaping are used together on the same NetRater board. b) Use the Rate information in the Transrate page of the Video Processing page in the NetProcessor Processing window to set the number (1 or 2) of units of processing that should be allocated for Rate shaping (see section “Procedure for CBR or VBR to CBR Transrating ("Capped VBR" or "Clamping")”, page 518): • If Rate IN is always < 5Mbps then 1 unit of processing is enough, • If Rate IN is < 10Mbps, then 2 units of processing are required.

Rate In measure for unit of processing management

Once the preconfiguration has been completed and accepted, the Operator will be informed in permanence about the available licenses (the number of available licenses is always displayed in the upper frame of the Splicing and Transrate windows).

Figure 2.20: Number of splicers and transraters resources (engines and licenses)

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

214

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

2.5.8.2 - Editing NetRater board(s) preconfiguration for splicing and Rate shaping 1. Type cfgdens after the CLI.Service prompt; 2. Type y after Do you want to change this parameter? if you wish to confirm the change or n if you wish to keep the previous mode; 3. Type the resource required for your application in term of Splicers; 4. Type the maximum bitrates of the Rate shaped services (< 5 Mbps or < 10 Mbps) before entering the resource required in term of Rate shapers. The maximum number of MPEG-2 SD Rate shapers depends on the chosen bitrate limit (5 or 10 Mbps). If 5 Mbps limit is chosen, it means that all services bitrate shall be lower than 5 Mbps and Operator will be able to define up to 64 SD Rate shapers per NetRater board. In case of 10 Mbps limit, maximum number of SD Rate shapers is 32; 5. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters? if you wish to confirm the new mode or n if you wish to keep the previous one;

Figure 2.21: NetRater board(s) preconfiguration

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

215

As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device by typing reboot after the prompt.

Figure 2.22: Rebooting the device

6. Type y to confirm the reboot (or n if you want to cancel the reboot).

The following message is displayed if the values entered via the CLI exceed the NetRater capacity.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

216

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

2.5.9 - Commands related to the splicing engines Two commands related to the splicing engines are available through the CLI: • the cfgspbr command which is used to change the default output values of the splicing engines. The default values depend on the video format (SD/HD, MPEG-2/MPEG-4). It is described in the following section “Editing the default output values of the splicing engines”, page 216; • the cfgsppol command which is used to define splicer policy in case of secondary channel failure while splicing. It is described in the following section “Editing the splicer policy in case of secondary channel failure while splicing”, page 218.

2.5.9.1 - Editing the default output values of the splicing

engines (Applicable to NetProcessor 9030/40 fitted with 1 or 2 NetRater board(s) Login/Password: Admin/nfp2006) The cfgspbr command is an expert parameter. It must be used by qualified personel only. Administrator rights are required (Login: Admin, Password: nfp2006). This command allows to change the default output values of the splicing engines. The default values depend on the video format (SD/HD, MPEG-2/MPEG-4). Changing the default output values of the splicing engines is required when the streams to be spliced have bitrates higher than the default values. Changing the default output values of the splicing engines is useful when the streams to be spliced have bitrates much lower than the default values in order to optimize the NetProcessor resource for video processing. 1. Type cfgspbr after the CLI.Admin prompt; 2. Type Yes after Do

you want to change these parameters [Y] / [N(Default)] ? to change the default output values of the splicing

engines; The following message will be displayed:

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

217

3. Type y after Do you want to continue[Y] / [N(Default)] ? if you wish to change the default values or n if you wish to keep them. 4. Enter the new values after Splice Transport bitrate for MPEG-2 SD, Splice Transport bitrate for MPEG-2 HD, Splice Transport bitrate for MPEG-4 SD, Splice Transport bitrate for MPEG-4 HD; 5. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters? if you wish to confirm the new values or n if you wish to keep the previous one;

Figure 2.23: Editing the default output values of the splicing engines

As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device by typing reboot after the prompt. 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

218

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

Figure 2.24: Rebooting the device

6. Type y to confirm the reboot (or n if you want to cancel the reboot).

2.5.9.2 - Editing the splicer policy in case of secondary channel

failure while splicing (Applicable to NetProcessor 9030/40 fitted with 1 or 2 NetRater board(s) Login/Password: service/service) The cfgsppol command allows Operator to define splicer policy in case of secondary channel failure while splicing. Two policies are available: • Auto-return to primary (default policy): In that case, the splicer will automatically switch back to primary channel in case of failure of the secondary channel; • Keep on secondary: Secondary channel will be maintained on-air until an explicit “splice in” command is received. This mode is typically useful in live-to-live splicing when secondary channel is redundant. Indeed in that case secondary redundancy is not seamless and splicer shall not switch back to primary but wait for redundant signal. This policy is applied to all spliced services. A reboot is needed to take change into account. 1. Type cfgsppol after the CLI.Service prompt; 2. Type Yes after Do

you want to change these parameters [Y] / [N(Default)] ? to change the splicer policy in case of secondary

channel failure while splicing;

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

219

Figure 2.25: Editing the splicer policy in case of secondary channel failure while splicing

As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device by typing reboot after the prompt.

Figure 2.26: Rebooting the device

3. Type y to confirm the reboot (or n if you want to cancel the reboot).

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

220

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

2.5.10 - Commands related to the ATSC mode (Applicable to NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, Login/Password: service/service) NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 are configured by default to operate in a DVB environment. They can be reconfigured to operate in an ATSC environment by proceeding as follows: 1. Type atscmode after the CLI.Service prompt; 2. Type y after Do you want to change this parameter? if you wish to confirm the change or n if you wish to keep the previous mode; 3. Type 1 to enable the ATSC mode; 4. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters? if you wish to confirm the new mode or n if you wish to keep the previous one;

Figure 2.27: Setting ATSC mode (atscmode)

As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device by typing reboot after the prompt.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

221

Figure 2.28: Rebooting the device

5. Type y to confirm the reboot (or n if you want to cancel it).

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

222

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

2.5.11 - Commands related to the DigiCypher streams NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40 can be configured using the sdigi CLI command to manage DigiCypher streams. In this case Service processing, Scrambling, Splicing and Rate shaping can be performed on Digicipher streams. It is possible to receive ISO or DigiCypher streams and build ISO or DigiCypher multiplexes in any combination (ISO -> DigiCypher, DigiCypher -> ISO, DigiCypher -> DigiCypher) according to the devices located up- and downstream. When NetProcessor is configured to manage DigiCypher streams, it is no longer possible to manage streams in DVB mode (it is not possible to have one output TS in DigiCypher mode and another one in DVB mode for instance).

2.5.11.1 - Displaying the DigiCypher mode (Applicable to NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, Login/Password: service/service or operator/operator) To display the DigiCypher mode, type gdigi after the prompt. Example:

Figure 2.29: Displaying the DigiCypher mode

In this example Input TS and Output TS are configured to deal with DigiCypher streams (DigiCypher mode = 1 for all Input TS and Output TS).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.5 - Setting the initial parameters via the Command Line Interface

223

2.5.11.2 - Editing the DigiCypher mode (Applicable to NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, Login/Password: service/service) 1. Type sdigi after the CLI.Service prompt; 2. Type 1 after INPUT: New DigiCypher mode behavior? to receive ISO or DigiCypher streams; 3. Type 1 after OUTPUT: New DigiCypher mode behavior? to build ISO or DigiCypher multiplexes; 4. Type y after Do you really want to apply these parameters? if you wish to confirm the new mode or n if you wish to keep the previous one.

Figure 2.30: Editing the DigiCypher mode

As indicated in the MESSAGE line, you have to reboot the device by typing reboot after the prompt.

Figure 2.31: Rebooting the device

5. Type y to confirm the reboot (or n if you want to cancel the reboot).

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

224

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.6 - Connecting the cables

2.6 - CONNECTING THE CABLES

2.6.1 - Connecting the cables to the main board ¤ CMD ports

CMD1 10/100Base-T connector: Connect the Management system and the external SCS Simulcrypt Synchronizer.

CMD2 10/100Base-T connector: Connect the external Data broadcaster and the ECMG when "internal SCS" scrambling mode is enabled on NetProcessor.

Note: CMD1 and CMD2 ports perform 10/100Mbps autosensing, Half Duplex/Full Duplex autonegotiation and host an autocrossover mechanism for cable connection.

Co lli sio n

Sp ee d/ A ct iv ity

Figure 2.32 : Connecting the cables to the main board (CMD ports)

8

1

Full 100

CMD1 and CMD2 LEDs

Left LED above the CMDx connector (Collision) Yellow fixed: collision Off: no collision Right LED above the CMDx connector (Speed/Activity) Green fixed: link Green flashing: activity Off: no link, no activity Top LED on the right hand side of the CMDx connector (Full) Green fixed = Full Duplex Off = Half Duplex Bottom LED on the right hand side of the CMDx connector (100) Green fixed = 100Mbps Off = 10Mbps NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.6 - Connecting the cables

225

¤ ASI ports

ASI IN and ASI OUT connectors: Connect the upstream ASI devices to the ASI IN connectors and the downstream ASI devices to the ASI OUT connectors. N903ASB4GA ASI In/Out (programmable)

N903ASB0GB ASI In (1 to 4)

ASI Out (1 to 4)

N903ASB3GA ASI In/Out (programmable)

Figure 2.33: Connecting the cables to the main board (ASI ports)

ASI ports of N903ASB3GA and N903ASB4GA boards can be programmed individually as inputs or outputs via the CLI interface (refer to section “Editing the number of ASI inputs for ASI FLEX board (sasiin)”, page 209). ¤ GPS port

GPS connectors: Connect an external GPS reveiver to clock and pps connectors for synchronizing the optional embedded SFN adapters (clock is not used in this release). N903ASB4GA

N903ASB0GB Clock pps

Figure 2.34 : Connecting the cables to the main board (GPS port) 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

226

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.6 - Connecting the cables

¤ GPI I/O port

GPI I/O connector: The GPI I/O consists of a GPI Out alarm relay closure interface used for remote NetProcessor alarm management and a GPI In interface used to trigger service replacement (see text) N903ASB4GA

Figure 2.35 : Connecting the cables to the main board (GPI I/O port)

The connector is male HD15. You are recommended to use an AWG 20 gauge cable. The pinout is given below: Pin

Function

1

BS1 Relay Inactive 6

BS1 Common 11 BS1 Relay Active

2

BS2 Relay Inactive 7

BS2 Common 12 BS2 Relay Active

3

BS3 Relay Inactive 8

BS3 Common 13 BS3 Relay Active

4

GPIN_1 9

GPIN_0 14 GPIN_2

5

P3V3_protected (200mA) 10

GPI Common 15 GND

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.6 - Connecting the cables

227

# GPI Out interface

P3

3V3 10k

BS1_Common BS1_Relay_Inactive BS1_Relay_Active BS2_Common BS2_Relay_Inactive BS2_Relay_Active BS3_Common BS3_Relay_Inactive BS3_Relay_Active GPI_IN0 GPI_IN1 GPI_IN2 GPI_IN_Common P3V_Protected

3V3

4.7k 8 BS1_Ctrl

¤

16

OE

+ 1

470 470

3

2 4

0.5A

GPI_OUT_1 interface output

6

7 5

BS1_Relay_Inactive BS1_Relay_Active BS1_Common

0.2A

GPI_OUT_1 interface output GPI_OUT_1 interface output

6 1 11 7 2 12 8 3 13 9 4 14 10 5 15 17

o o o o o

o o o

o o

o o o

o

o

¤

3V3

Figure 2.36: GPI Out interface

GPI Out is performed via insulated relays BS1, BS2 and BS3. All three points of each relay are provided on the connector. The following table gives relay position (i-e which pin is connected to Common). • BS1 shows whether the NetProcessor is powered. • BS2 shows Red "alarm" Front panel LED state. • BS3 shows Orange "warning" Front panel LED state.

Condition

BS1

BS2

BS3

NetProcessor not powered

Inactive

Inactive

Inactive

NetProcessor powered

Active

_

_

Major Alarm

Active

Active

_

Minor Alarm

Active

_

Active

Electrical characteristics are as follows: • Nominal characteristics -

Switched voltage: 24 Vdc or 24 Veff Switched Current: 0.5 A @ 25°C Switched Power: 15 VA Insulation > 200 V

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

228

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.6 - Connecting the cables

• Ratings - Max Voltage: 110 Vdc or 125 VAC - Max Current: 1 A - Max Power: 30 W or 37.5 VA A 3.3 V voltage is available on pin 5 to power the alarm lines. It is overload protected. Max current is 150 mA. # GPI In interface P3 ¤

16

1k

470

0.2A GPI_IN_0

GPIO_GPIN_0 470

OE

400pF GPI_IN_Common

GPIN_EN_L

GPI_IN_0 interface input GPI_IN_1 interface output

BS1_Common BS1_Relay_Inactive BS1_Relay_Active BS2_Common BS2_Relay_Inactive BS2_Relay_Active BS3_Common BS3_Relay_Inactive BS3_Relay_Active GPI_IN0 GPI_IN1 GPI_IN2 GPI_IN_Common P3V_Protected 0.2A

GPI_IN_2 interface output

6 1 11 7 2 12 8 3 13 9 4 14 10 5 15 17

o o o o o

o o o o

o

o o o o o

¤

3V3

Figure 2.37: GPI In interface

GPI In is performed via opto-couplers. Inputs shares a floating common point. Provided insulation is 200V. The board provides 3 inputs. Each input is protected against over current with a Positive Temperature Coefficient. Each input is protected against over voltage with a Varistor. Level is polled periodically. Polling period is 1 second. Active level is settable in the Web Graphical User Interface.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.6 - Connecting the cables

229

¤ EXT_1 port

EXT1 10/100Base-T connector: Connect an Ethernet link for data service (see text).

EXT_1 is used to create a bridged tunnel between 2 devices (e.g. NetProcessor) using one ATM PVC. The devices must belong to the same IP subnet. Connection depends on the application. An example is given below:

EXT_1

CMD_1

EXT_1

CMD_1

Note: EXT_1 port performs 10/100/1000Mbps autosensing, Half Duplex/Full Duplex autonegotiation and hosts an autocrossover mechanism (auto MDI/MDI-X) for cable connection. Figure 2.38: ATM remote NetProcessor

Comments: on the remote NetProcessor, Extension 1 port must be externally connected to CMD1 (or CMD2) port.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

230

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.6 - Connecting the cables

2.6.2 - Connecting the cables to the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces

LAN/WAN port 1

LAN/WAN port 2

Both ports are combo 10/100/1000Base-T, 1000Base-X (SFP) ports. Selection between copper and optical interfaces is automatic with a priority to copper. If an optional SFP module is plugged in, this link will be activated only if copper link is down (e.g. not connected). 1000Base-T ports (electrical with RJ45) perform 100/1000Mbps autosensing, Half Duplex/Full Duplex autonegotiation and host an autocrossover mechanism (auto MDI/MDI-X) for cable connection. Figure 2.39: Connecting the cables to the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces

2.6.3 - Connecting the cables to the ATM extension board

Port ATM# 1

Port ATM# 2

Port ATM# 1 and Port ATM# 2 connectors: Connect the ATM network(s) input/output to the SFP module of the ATM extension board. Note concerning the electrical SFP module N900SSF3AA Electrical SFP module is provided with two BNC adaptation cables. These BNC connectors should be mounted on a panel. Panel cutout to use is described on the following drawing

Figure 2.40: Connecting the cables to the ATM extension board NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.6 - Connecting the cables

231

2.6.4 - Connecting the cables to the ASI extension board

ASI IN connectors: Connect the upstream ASI devices X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6

Figure 2.41: Connecting the cables to the ASI extension board

2.6.5 - Connecting the cables to the GPO board

GPO connector

Figure 2.42: Connecting the cables to the GPO board

The GPO alarm relay closure interface is used for remote management of the following NetProcessor alarms: • Relay 1: Power off. In normal situation, NetProcessor is powered on and this relay is active. • Relay 2: Error status. In normal situation, there is no error and this relay is inactive. • Relay 3: Warning status. In normal situation, there is no warning and this relay is inactive. In a system configuration, the different chassis alarm outputs can be grouped together to form parallel contacts which are Normally Open (Normally stands for "device at power on, with no alarms, with no error") or to serialize contacts which are Normally Closed.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

232

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.6 - Connecting the cables

The pinout of the SUB-D 9/female connector is as follows: Pin

Signal

1

Relay 2 (Common)

2

Relay 3 (Normally Closed)

3

Relay 3 (Normally Open)

4

Relay 1 (Common)

5

Relay 3 (Common)

6

Relay 2 (Normally Closed)

7

Relay 2 (Normally Open)

8

Relay 1 (Normally Open)

9

Relay 1 (Normally Closed)

The relay closure interface is shown below - this situation corresponds to the normal situation, i-e relay 1 active (power on), relay 2 inactive (no error) and relay 3 inactive (no warning):

Figure 2.43: Relay closure interface in normal situation

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.6 - Connecting the cables

233

2.6.6 - Connecting the cables to the DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End

RF In1 and RF In2 connectors: RF inputs (L-Band) for Front-End 1 and Front-End 2 respectively.

The PCMCIA slot accepts one DVB-CI module (CAM) in order to descramble a set of components in one demodulated TS.

The two ASI outputs (ASI OUT1 for Front-End 1 and ASI OUT2 for Front-End 2) provide the two demodulated TS either prior descrambling or after descrambling according to Operator’s choice in the GUI:

Figure 2.44: Connecting the cables to the DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

234

Chapter 2 - Installation and Start up 2.6 - Connecting the cables

BLANK PAGE

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation

235

Chapter 3 Operation 3.1 - NetProcessor operation via a Web Browser............................................... 240 3.1.1 - Foreword ................................................................................................. 3.1.2 - Purpose ................................................................................................... 3.1.3 - Setting up the link between the PC and the Web Interface..................... 3.1.4 - Web Interface page breakdown ..............................................................

240 240 241 243

3.2 - Setup procedure steps.................................................................................. 245 3.2.1 - Step 1: Setting the interface static parameters ....................................... 247 3.2.2 - Step 2: Setting the dynamic Tx and Rx parameters................................ 252 3.2.3 - Step 3: Setting the Multiplexer inputs...................................................... 257 3.2.4 - Step 4: Creating and setting the Multiplexer output TS........................... 261 3.2.5 - Step 5: Connecting the Multiplexer outputs to the physical interfaces (ASI, Gigabit Ethernet,...) .................................................................................................... 263 3.2.6 - Step 6: Setting the preprocessing ........................................................... 265 3.2.7 - Step 7: Setting the service processing .................................................... 268 3.2.8 - Step 8: Setting the video processing ....................................................... 271 3.2.9 - Step 9: Setting the global settings........................................................... 274 3.2.10 - Step 10: Setting the automation ............................................................ 277 3.2.11 - Step 11: Injecting data........................................................................... 279 3.2.12 - Step 12: Setting the In-Band Control & Command over ATM and the Data service over ATM ......................................................... 282 3.3 - Installation menu ........................................................................................... 285 3.3.1 - LEDs........................................................................................................ 3.3.2 - Clicking on the panel charts .................................................................... 3.3.3 - Shortcut commands attached to the connectors ..................................... 3.3.4 - In-Band Control & Command over ATM setup menu .............................. 3.3.4.1 - Global settings sub-panel ............................................................ 3.3.4.2 - Links list sub-panel ...................................................................... 3.3.5 - Data service over ATM menus ................................................................ 3.3.5.1 - Extension port dialog box............................................................. 3.3.5.2 - Data service dialog box................................................................

286 287 289 305 306 306 308 309 309

3.4 - Configuration menu ...................................................................................... 311 3.4.1 - Top view and processing sub-menus...................................................... 313 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

236

Chapter 3 - Operation

3.4.1.1 - Top view sub-menu ...................................................................... 313 3.4.1.2 - Processing sub-menu................................................................... 314 3.4.1.2.1 - Sub-windows .................................................................. 315 3.4.1.2.1.1 - Monitoring sub-window ................................................316 Panels ........................................................................................316 Multiplexing monitoring ...............................................................317 ECM monitoring ..........................................................................318 Signalling monitoring ..................................................................319 3.4.1.2.1.2 - Configuration sub-window............................................321 3.4.1.2.1.3 - Alarm and Service replacement monitoring sub-window323

3.4.1.2.2 - Help, Save, Check and Apply buttons............................ 325 3.4.1.2.2.1 - Help button...................................................................325 3.4.1.2.2.2 - Save, Check and Apply buttons ...................................326

3.4.1.3 - Setting the physical interface static configuration......................... 327 3.4.1.3.1 - Interface setup menus.................................................... 327 3.4.1.3.2 - ASI setup dialog boxes................................................... 328 3.4.1.3.2.1 - Overview ......................................................................328 3.4.1.3.2.2 - ASI In setup dialog box ................................................329 3.4.1.3.2.3 - ASI Out setup dialog box .............................................330

3.4.1.3.3 - RF In setup dialog boxes................................................ 331 3.4.1.3.4 - ATM setup dialog boxes................................................. 335 3.4.1.3.5 - IP setup dialog boxes ..................................................... 338 3.4.1.3.6 - Data injection setup dialog boxes................................... 343 3.4.1.3.7 - GPS PPS setup dialog box ............................................ 349 3.4.1.4 - Setting the Tx and Rx dynamic network communication parameters 350 3.4.1.4.1 - ATM Rx and ATM Tx setup menus ................................ 351 3.4.1.4.1.1 - ATM Rx list and ATM Rx setup dialog box...................352 3.4.1.4.1.2 - ATM Tx list and ATM Tx setup dialog box ...................354

3.4.1.4.2 - IP Rx and IP Tx setup menus......................................... 356 3.4.1.4.2.1 - IP Rx list and IP Rx setup dialog box ...........................357 3.4.1.4.2.2 - IP Tx list and IP Tx setup dialog box ............................362

3.4.1.5 - Setting the Multiplexer input TS configuration .............................. 369 3.4.1.5.1 - Purpose .......................................................................... 369 3.4.1.5.2 - Creating Multiplexer input TS ......................................... 371 3.4.1.5.3 - Connecting the Multiplexer input TS to the physical interfaces (ASI In, ATM, Gigabit Ethernet, RF In) ............................................ 371 3.4.1.5.4 - Editing the Multiplexer input TS...................................... 372 3.4.1.6 - Creating the Multiplexer output TS ............................................... 377 3.4.1.6.1 - Purpose ......................................................................... 377 3.4.1.6.2 - Creating a Multiplexer output TS ................................... 377 3.4.1.6.3 - Removing a Multiplexer output TS ................................ 379 3.4.1.6.4 - Removing all Multiplexer output TS............................... 380 3.4.1.7 - Connecting the Multiplexer output TS to the physical interfaces (ASI Out, ATM, Gigabit Ethernet) ................................................................... 381 3.4.1.7.1 - Purpose ......................................................................... 381 3.4.1.7.2 - Creating a new output connection................................. 382

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation

237

3.4.1.7.3 - Deleting an output connection ...................................... 382 3.4.1.8 - Setting the preprocessing ............................................................ 383 3.4.1.8.1 - Descrambling ................................................................. 383 Overview .................................................................................... 383 Procedure .................................................................................. 384

3.4.1.8.2 - Service redundancy ....................................................... 387 Overview .................................................................................... 387 Procedure .................................................................................. 387

3.4.1.9 - Setting the service processing ..................................................... 396 3.4.1.9.1 - Purpose......................................................................... 396 3.4.1.9.2 - Overview of the Multiplexing page ................................ 397 3.4.1.9.2.1 - Items displayed in the Multiplexing left pane ............... 397 3.4.1.9.2.2 - Display modes in the Multiplexing left pane................. 399 3.4.1.9.2.3 - Nodes and shortcut commands in the Multiplexing panel401

3.4.1.9.3 - Output TS configuration ................................................ 409 3.4.1.9.4 - Signalling configuration................................................. 412 3.4.1.9.5 - Table configuration ....................................................... 415 3.4.1.9.5.1 - Basic methods to inject SI/PSI tables from an external carousel (typically SI/PSI generator) ................................................ 415 TS ghost injected ....................................................................... 415 DVB-Simulcrypt injection over Ethernet ..................................... 415 3.4.1.9.5.2 - Methods to supply SI/PSI tables to a NetProcessor internal carousel ................................................................................... 416

3.4.1.9.6 3.4.1.9.7 3.4.1.9.8 3.4.1.9.9

- Generated service configuration ................................... - Locally built or crossing Service Configuration ............. - Component configuration.............................................. - Building a multiplex: Use cases ....................................

451 453 463 468

3.4.1.9.9.1 - Navigation.................................................................... 468 3.4.1.9.9.2 - Attaching the entire content of an input to a multiplex . 469 3.4.1.9.9.3 - Attaching a service to a multiplex ................................ 470 3.4.1.9.9.4 - Attaching a component to a multiplex as a ghost component ............................................................. 473 3.4.1.9.9.5 - Attaching a component to a (crossing or locally built) service ..................................................................................... 476 3.4.1.9.9.6 - Attaching a shared component to several (crossing or locally built) services........................................................................... 478 3.4.1.9.9.7 - Attaching a duplicated component to several (crossing or locally built) services................................................................... 479

3.4.1.9.10 - SFN Adapter ................................................................ 481 3.4.1.9.10.1 - Overview.................................................................... 481 3.4.1.9.10.2 - Editing MIP ................................................................ 482

3.4.1.9.11 - Bitrate management..................................................... 488 3.4.1.9.11.1 - Overview.................................................................... 488 3.4.1.9.11.2 - Features..................................................................... 488 3.4.1.9.11.3 - Procedure .................................................................. 489

3.4.1.9.12 - Service Substitution ..................................................... 495 3.4.1.9.12.1 - Overview.................................................................... 495

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

238

Chapter 3 - Operation

3.4.1.9.12.2 - Features .....................................................................496 3.4.1.9.12.3 - Procedure...................................................................496

3.4.1.10 - Setting the Video processing...................................................... 503 3.4.1.10.1 - Splice setup.................................................................. 503 Overview ....................................................................................503 NetProcessor preconfiguration ...................................................503 Sizing ..........................................................................................505 Procedure ...................................................................................507

3.4.1.10.2 - Transrate setup ............................................................ 517 Overview ....................................................................................517 NetProcessor preconfiguration ...................................................517 Sizing ..........................................................................................518 Procedure for CBR or VBR to CBR Transrating ("Capped VBR" or "Clamping") ................................................................................518 CBR or VBR to VBR Transrating with statistical multiplexing ....525

3.4.1.11 - Setting the global settings .......................................................... 532 3.4.1.11.1 - Scrambling ................................................................... 532 Overview ....................................................................................532 Operation ....................................................................................534

3.4.1.11.2 - Installing the GPI device............................................... 545 3.4.1.12 - Automation ................................................................................. 547 Overview ....................................................................................547 Operation ....................................................................................548

3.4.1.13 - Editing Data injection and connecting an injected stream .......... 553 Connect an injected stream menu ..............................................554 Data injection editing ..................................................................557

3.4.2 - Stored Configurations menu .................................................................... 3.4.2.1 - Save the current device configuration to any memory ................. 3.4.2.2 - Edit a stored configuration file ...................................................... 3.4.2.3 - Export a memory content to a remote PC .................................... 3.4.2.4 - Import a saved configuration from a remote PC........................... 3.4.2.5 - Apply a saved configuration that will become the current configuration ....................................................................... 3.4.2.6 - Apply an empty configuration that will become the current configuration ................................................................. 3.4.2.7 - Delete the content of a memory ...................................................

559 560 561 562 563 564 564 565

3.5 - Maintenance menu......................................................................................... 566 3.5.1 - Reboot menu ........................................................................................... 566 3.5.2 - Options menu........................................................................................... 567 3.5.3 - Global setting menu ................................................................................. 568 3.6 - Status menu ................................................................................................... 572 3.6.1 - All alarms menu ....................................................................................... 572 3.6.2 - Events menu ............................................................................................ 573 3.6.3 - Report menu ............................................................................................ 574

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation

239

3.7 - Monitoring menu ........................................................................................... 575 3.7.1 - MPEG monitoring menu .......................................................................... 3.7.1.1 - Purpose........................................................................................ 3.7.1.2 - Monitoring window layout............................................................. 3.7.1.3 - Operation ..................................................................................... 3.7.2 - Splice monitoring menu ........................................................................... 3.7.3 - Network port counters menu ................................................................... 3.7.4 - RF monitoring menu ................................................................................

576 576 576 581 583 585 586

3.8 - Appendix: ECM/EMM filtering using the Command Line Interface .......... 587 3.8.1 - Purpose ................................................................................................... 3.8.2 - Accessing the Command Line Interface.................................................. 3.8.3 - Login and password ................................................................................ 3.8.4 - Commands relating to ECM/EMM filtering ..............................................

8566216E(01) September 2010

587 587 589 590

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

240

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.1 - NetProcessor operation via a Web Browser

3.1 - NETPROCESSOR OPERATION VIA A WEB BROWSER

NetProcessor operation is performed via a Web Browser for all operations except the incoming ECM/EMM filtering operation which is controlled using the Command Line Interface (see section “Appendix: ECM/EMM filtering using the Command Line Interface”, page 587).

3.1.1 - Foreword The embedded Web application requires: • Microsoft Internet Explorer release 7.0 as Web Browser; • JRE release 1.6_20.

3.1.2 - Purpose NetProcessor’s Web interface enables the Operator to: • set the device; • launch maintenance commands, e.g. device restart; • view device alarms; • get input and output stream descriptions.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.1 - NetProcessor operation via a Web Browser

241

3.1.3 - Setting up the link between the PC and the Web Interface To set up the link between the operating PC and the NetProcessor Web Interface, proceed as follows: 1. Connect the PC Ethernet link to the CMD1 connector on the NetProcessor rear panel, or to the network connected to this connector. 2. Run the Web Browser on the PC and enter the NetProcessor IP address in the URL (factory set address: 192.168.1.1):

Following connection, the Web Interface Login page will be displayed:

Figure 3.1: Login page

The login page enables the Operator to be authenticated by the system. A message indicates whether the browser configuration is optimal. If this is not the case, you must update your JRE (Java Run Environment) with the 1.6_20 release which can be found in the CD-ROM.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

242

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.1 - NetProcessor operation via a Web Browser

3. Provide a user name and a password. The Web Interface has two predefined user groups: service and operator. • The service group is for Technicians who are responsible for installation. The Login and password are respectively: service and service. • The operator group is for Users who are in charge of operation. The Login and password are respectively: operator and operator. Web Interface commands are the same regardless of the user group used. 1. The Web interface is case sensitive (e.g. service is correct, Service is not correct). 2. You can save the user name and the password by clicking the Login parameters saving check box allowing the login fields to be automatically filled at the next connections. 4. Click on the Login button to confirm. The Identification page, which is the home page, will be displayed:

Figure 3.2: Identification page

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.1 - NetProcessor operation via a Web Browser

243

3.1.4 - Web Interface page breakdown Each page has the same structure.

Figure 3.3: Web Interface page breakdown

A page contains four distinct zones: • The header, which contains the navigation menus: Installation, Configuration, Maintenance, Status and Monitoring. • A panel which gives the name of the user, the number of connected users, a link for the user to logout, the name of the current configuration, the NetProcessor SysName and the NetProcessor status (active or inactive). The name of the current configuration can be edited by clicking on the icon

8566216E(01) September 2010

:

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

244

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.1 - NetProcessor operation via a Web Browser

Figure 3.1: Dialog box to edit the configuration name

It can also be edited in the Stored configuration window accessible through the Stored configuration command in the Configuration menu of the menu bar (see section “Stored Configurations menu”, page 559). • The body (core) of the page, which depends on the context. • The footer, which provides contextual information, copyright information and the software version.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

245

3.2 - SETUP PROCEDURE STEPS

NetProcessor’s processing is illustrated in the following block diagram. This diagram also shows the following setup procedure steps: 1. Setting the ASI, ATM, Gigabit Ethernet, DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End and Data injection interface static configuration; 2. Setting the Tx and Rx dynamic network communication parameters; 3. Setting the Multiplexer inputs; 4. Creating and Setting the Multiplexer outputs; 5. Connecting the Multiplexer outputs to the physical interfaces; 6. Setting the preprocessing, e.g. • Setting the DVB-CI descrambling, • Setting the service redundancy feature; 7. Setting the service processing, e.g. • Setting the multiplexing feature by adding TS, adding services, adding components, creating local service, remapping SID and PID, • Setting the SFN adapter, • Managing Bitrate management with Automatic Component Filtering policy, • Setting the service substitution feature; 8. Setting the video processing, e.g. • Setting the Splicing feature, • Setting the Rate shaping feature (Transrating) from CBR/VBR to Capped VBR or from CBR/VBR to VBR services with statistical multiplexing; 9. Setting the global settings, e.g. • Setting the scrambling feature (in internal SCS mode), • Installing the GPI devices; 10. Setting the automation, e.g. designating the GPI contacts which will trigger the service replacement; 11. Injecting data;

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

246

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

12. Setting the data service over ATM and the In-Band Control & Command over ATM.

Figure 3.1: NetProcessor’s processing block diagram NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

247

3.2.1 - Step 1: Setting the interface static parameters

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ASI

ASI

ASI & RF In

ASI

ASI

ASI ASI

ASI

ETH

ETH

ETH ETH

1

ETH

DATA ETH

Setting the interface static parameters

Figure 3.2: Setting the interface static parameters

The static parameters called ASI setup, ATM setup and ETH setup set the operating mode for the ASI, ATM and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. The static parameters called RF inputs set the operating mode for the DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End. The Data setup sets the streams injected through the CMD2 interface. The commands for setting these parameters are only used during initial setup (or in rare cases such as after the device has been moved).

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

248

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

These commands are used to configure: • the following ASI setup parameters: Label, Enable/Disable, Delay and Delay value for the ASI IN setup parameters and Label, Enable/Disable, Packet size and Distribution for the ASI OUT setup parameters. • the following ATM setup parameters: Label, Enable/Disable, Clock Source, OAM activity, Mode and Loopback mode, Scrambling, Cosset. • the following ETH setup parameters: Physical port label, Interface nominal status, Interface backup status, Interface Speed & Mode, IP address, Netmask, IGMP protocol handling, Shaping On/Off, Maximum output bit rate, Dynamic IP routing, Static IP Routing. • the following RF inputs setup parameters: Label, Enable/Disable, Standard (DVB-S / DVB-S2), Frequency, Symbol Rate, Head Alimentation (On / Off), Polarity, Frequency range, Code Rate, Rolloff (for DVB-S2 only), Pilot (for DVB-S2 only). • the following Data setup parameters: - Create injected streams for general settings (Label, Min rate, Max rate) and specific settings (Client Id, Data Id, Data injection mode, Data injection type, UDP port, Stream type, Transport Stream Id, Network Id), - Data injection global configuration for Service port settings (EMMG/PDG Service port, PSIG Service port, PITG Service port).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

249

All these commands can be found in the Top view chart.

Two ways of accessing the same dialog box

Two ways of accessing the same dialog box

Figure 3.3: Top view chart (ASI, ATM and Gigabit Ethernet setup)

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

250

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

Figure 3.4: Top view chart (Data injection setup)

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

251

The ASI, ATM and Gigabit Ethernet commands can also be accessed by clicking on the connector icons on the Identification page.

ASI In/ASI Out boundary line is programmable

ATM extension board

ASI extension board

DVB-S DVB-S2 Front-End

Figure 3.5: Identification page 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

252

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

A detailed description of the ASI & RF In, ATM, Gigabit Ethernet and Data interface setup commands will be given in section “Interface setup menus”, page 327.

3.2.2 - Step 2: Setting the dynamic Tx and Rx parameters

/SDH Network

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ASI

ASI

ASI & RF In

ASI

ASI

ASI ASI

ASI

ETH

ETH

ETH Network

ATM/PDH/SDH

ATM

ATM

ETH

DATA

IP Netw ETH

ETH

Setting the (dynamic) network communication parameters

2

Figure 3.6: Setting the Tx and Rx parameters

The ATM or IP transmission and reception parameters are required for setting up network communications. • MPEG over ATM adaptation provides simultaneous emission of up to 4 MPEG streams and reception of up to 4 MPEG streams with the N903PDH0GA E3/DS3 and N903STMSGA STM/SONET interface boards or simultaneous emission of up to N MPEG streams and reception of up to (10-N) MPEG streams with the N903STMFGA interface board. The total number of transmitted and received MPEG streams may also be limited by the software option installed in the device.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

253

• MPEG over IP adaptation provides simultaneous reception of up to 64 MPEG streams and transmission of up to 12 MPEG streams without the streaming option or 128 MPEG streams with the streaming option (N903S1PSAA or N903S1FSAA), all shared out on the 2 Gigabit Ethernet ports. The following parameters are adjusted with each transmission setup. • For ATM Rx: Label, Activity on/off, Selected port, VPI, VCI, FEC, Clock recovery and Delay. • For ATM Tx: Label, Activity on/off, Selected port, VPI, VCI and FEC. • For IP Rx: - Transport layer: Label, Activity on/off, Selected port, Multicast destination IP address, Source IP address and Reception UDP port. - Adaptation layer: Rx Decapsulation, Rx FEC module on/off, Requested IPDV Tolerance, Reordering Tolerance, Clock recovery, Rate value, SFN Headroom. - Advanced parameters: Delay enable/disable and Delay value. • For IP Tx: - Transport layer: Label, Activity on/off, Selected port, Destination IP address, Destination UDP port, Source IP address, MPEG TOS/Diffserv byte, TTL, QOS tagging, VLAN Id, User Priority, Use ARP and Destination MAC Address, - Adaptation layer: Tx Encapsulation, MPEG packets per IP frame, Null packets discard and FEC settings.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

254

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

These parameters can be found in the ATM Rx list, ATM Tx list and IP Rx list, IP Tx list views, which are accessible via the ATM Setup and Gigabit Ethernet Setup menus in the Top view chart.

Figure 3.7: ATM Rx setup, ATM Tx setup and IP Rx setup, IP Tx setup dialog boxes via the ATM Rx list, ATM Tx list and IP Rx list, IP Tx list views

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

255

They are also available via the Connections views by clicking on the Transport Input and Transport Output labels in the Top view chart and by clicking on the ATM connector and Gigabit Ethernet icons on the Identification page.

Figure 3.8: ATM Rx setup, ATM Tx setup and IP Rx setup, IP Tx setup dialog boxes via the Connections views

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

256

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

ATM #1

ATM #2

LAN/WAN LAN/WAN port #1 port #2

Figure 3.9: Identification page

A detailed description of Tx and Rx network communication commands will be given in section “Setting the Tx and Rx dynamic network communication parameters”, page 350.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

257

3.2.3 - Step 3: Setting the Multiplexer inputs

Figure 3.10: Setting the Multiplexer inputs

In this step the Operator will perform the following operations on each Multiplexer input TS: • setting the label; • filtering the incoming ECM related to descrambled services or components (if required); • setting the signalling mode (ISO, DVB, CUSTOM); 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

258

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

• extracting and setting the recurrence survey periodicity of incoming tables; • setting the transmission mode (Transparent or SI driven). The number of Multiplexer input TS depends on the options that have been installed in the device: Option N903ST1XAA

N903ST1YAA

Number of TS inputs Software option. License for the processing of 1 additional input TS (4 input TS in the basic configuration). Up to 12 options can be ordered to manage a total of 16 input TS. Software option. License to extend the number of input services above 16. One option per additional service.

Multiplexer inputs are automatically created by NetProcessor (there is no Create new input command in the Graphic User Interface).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

259

The commands are available in the Multiplexer inputs panel of the Mux I/O page, which is accessible via the Processing shortcut command in the Configuration bar menu.

Figure 3.11: Multiplexer inputs panel of the Mux I/0 page

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

260

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

They are also accessible from the Top view chart.

(display only, connections cannot be changed)

Edit an input

Figure 3.12: Access through the Top view chart

A detailed description of Multiplexer input commands will be given in section “Setting the Multiplexer input TS configuration”, page 369.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

261

3.2.4 - Step 4: Creating and setting the Multiplexer output TS

Figure 3.13: Creating and setting the Multiplexer output TS

In this step, the Operator will perform the following operations for each output TS: 1. Creating the Multiplex output TS 2. Setting the Multiplex output TS i-e setting the label, the output signalling mode (ISO, DVB, ATSCsee note, No signalling), the TS identification (TS ID, Network ID) and the output TS bitrate The ATSC choice is available only if ATSC PSIP has been enabled on NetProcessor through its CLI (see section “Commands related to the ATSC mode”, page 220).

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

262

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

The number of Multiplexer output TS depends on the options that have been installed in the device. Option N903ST0XAA

Number of TS Outputs License for the generation of 1 additional output TS. Up to 5 options can be ordered to get 6 independent output MPTS.

N903S1PSAA

License for the streaming of a maximum of 128 TS without FEC (mix of SPTS and MPTS max 6 MPTS). Maximum performance depends on device load.

N903S1FSAA

License for the streaming of a maximum of 128 TS (mix of SPTS and MPTS, max 6 MPTS). FEC on 4 IP steam in + 64 IP stream out. Maximum performance depends on device load.

The commands are available in the Multiplexer outputs panel of the Mux I/O page, which is accessible via the Processing shortcut command in the Configuration bar menu.

Figure 3.14: Multiplexer outputs panel of the Mux I/0 page

A detailed description of the commands used for creating and setting an output TS will be given in section “Creating the Multiplexer output TS”, page 377.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

263

3.2.5 - Step 5: Connecting the Multiplexer outputs to the physical interfaces (ASI, Gigabit Ethernet,...)

Figure 3.15: Connecting the Multiplexer outputs to the physical interfaces

The Operator can connect the Multiplexer output to one or more ASI, ATM and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. These parameters are adjusted according to operating condition requirements. The Operator can access the following commands Create new connection and Remove connection for the Multiplexer output. They can be found in the Connection list view, which is accessible via the Output Patch Panel shortcut commands in the Top View chart.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

264

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

Remove a connection Create a new connection

Figure 3.16: Connections commands in the Top view chart

A detailed description of connection commands will be given in section “Connecting the Multiplexer output TS to the physical interfaces (ASI Out, ATM, Gigabit Ethernet)”, page 381

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

265

3.2.6 - Step 6: Setting the preprocessing

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ATM

ASI

IN

ASI & RF In

ASI

OUT

ASI

IN ASI

ASI

ETH

ETH

ETH

ETH ETH

ETH

6

Setting the preprocessing for

each output TS • Setting the DVB-CI descrambling • Setting the Service redundancy

Figure 3.17: Setting the preprocessing

In this step, the Operator will set the preprocessing for each output TS. Setting the preprocessing consists of: • Setting the DVB-CI descrambling; • Setting the service redundancy.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

266

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

The DVB-CI descrambling commands are available in the Descrambling panel of the Preprocessing page, which is accessible via the Processing shortcut command in the Configuration bar menu.

Figure 3.18: Descrambling panel of the Preprocessing page

A detailed description of the DVB-CI descrambling commands will be given in section “Descrambling”, page 383.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

267

The service redundancy commands are available in the Service redundancy panel of the Preprocessing page, which is accessible via the Processing shortcut command in the Configuration bar menu.

Figure 3.19: Service Redundancy panel of the Preprocessing page

A detailed description of the service redundancy commands will be given in section “Service redundancy”, page 387.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

268

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

3.2.7 - Step 7: Setting the service processing

Figure 3.20: Setting the service processing

In this step, the Operator will set the service processing for each Multiplexer output TS. Setting the service processing consists of: • Setting the multiplexing feature by adding TS, adding services, adding components, creating local service, remapping SID and PID; • Setting the SFN adapter; • Configuring Bitrate management with Automatic Component Filtering policy; • Setting the service substitution feature. NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

269

The Multiplexing, SFN adapter and Bitrate management commands are available in the Multiplexing panel of the Service Processing page, which is accessible via the Processing shortcut command in the Configuration bar menu.

Multiplexing

bitrate management SFN Adapter

Figure 3.21: Multiplexing panel in the Service Processing page

A detailed description of the Multiplexing commands will be given in section “Building a multiplex: Use cases”, page 468. A detailed description of the SFN adapter commands will be given in section “SFN Adapter”, page 481. A detailed description of the Bitrate management commands will be given in section “Bitrate management”, page 488.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

270

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

The commands for Service Substitution are available in the Substitution panel of the Service Processing page, which is accessible via the Processing shortcut command in the Configuration bar menu.

Figure 3.22: Substitution panel of the Service Processing page

A detailed description of the Service Processing commands will be given in section “Service Substitution”, page 495.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

271

3.2.8 - Step 8: Setting the video processing

Figure 3.23: Setting the video processing

In this step, the Operator will set the video processing for each Multiplexer output TS. Setting the video processing consists of: • Setting the Splicing feature; • Setting the Rate Shaping feature, i-e Transrating (Rate shaping) from CBR/VBR to Capped VBR or from CBR/VBR to VBR services with statistical multiplexing.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

272

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

The Splicing commands are available in the Splice panel of the Video Processing page, which is accessible via the Processing shortcut command in the Configuration bar menu.

Figure 3.24: Splice panel of the Video Processing page

A detailed description of the Splice commands will be given in section “Splice setup”, page 503

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

273

The Rate Shaping commands are available in the Transrate panel of the Video Processing page, which is accessible via the Processing shortcut command in the Configuration bar menu.

Figure 3.25: Transrate panel of the Video Processing page

A detailed description of the Rate Shaping commands will be given in section “Transrate setup”, page 517.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

274

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

3.2.9 - Step 9: Setting the global settings

Figure 3.26: Setting the global settings

In this step, the Operator will set the global settings for each Multiplexer output TS. Setting the global settings consists of: • Setting the scrambling parameters (in internal SCS mode); • Installing the GPI devices.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

275

The scrambling commands are available in the Scrambling panel of the Global settings page, which is accessible via the Processing shortcut command in the Configuration bar menu.

Figure 3.27: Scrambling panel of the Global Settings page

A detailed description of the scrambling commands will be given in section “Scrambling”, page 532.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

276

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

The commands for installing the GPI devices are available in the GPI device Installation panel of the Global settings page, which is accessible via the Processing shortcut command in the Configuration bar menu.

Figure 3.28: GPI device Installation panel of the Global Settings page

A detailed description of the GPI device installation commands will be given in section “Installing the GPI device”, page 545.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

277

3.2.10 - Step 10: Setting the automation

Figure 3.29: Setting the automation

In this step, the Operator will set the automatic configuration for the whole NetProcessor. Setting the automatic configuration consists for the Operator to indicate the GPI contacts of the GPI devices which will trigger Service redundancy switch-overs, Service substitution switch-overs, Splice switch-overs.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

278

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

The automation commands can be found in the Automation panel of the Global settings page, which is accessible via the Processing shortcut command in the Configuration bar menu.

Figure 3.30: Actions panel and Triggers panel in the Automation page

A detailed description of the automation commands will be given in section “Automation”, page 547.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

279

3.2.11 - Step 11: Injecting data

Figure 3.31: Injecting data

In this step, the Operator will attach one or more injected data streams to each Multiplexer output TS. The data streams have already been declared in the Data setup dialog boxes (see section “Step 1: Setting the interface static parameters”, page 247).. This feature is not used when ATSC is enabled on NetProcessor as in this case, data injection is used to insert PSIP tables from a PEARL server and the data injection connection features are not relevant. Two data injection commands are available, Connect an injected stream and Data injection editing: • The Connect an injected stream command opens a wizard which makes easier data injection connection editing. It consists of three steps: - Step #1: Select the injected stream, - Step #2: Assign a PID and set the attachment, 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

280

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

- Step #3: Edit the descriptors.

Figure 3.32: Wizard for data stream injection

• The Data injection editing command enables the Operator to change the PID and the service attachment if required.

Figure 3.33: Data injection editing

A detailed description of the data injection commands will be given in section “Editing Data injection and connecting an injected stream”, page 553.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

281

These two data injection commands can be found in the Injected Stream lists dialog box, which is accessible via the Data injection setup menu in the Top view chart.

Figure 3.34: Access to the Data injection wizard 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

282

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

3.2.12 - Step 12: Setting the In-Band Control & Command over ATM and the Data service over ATM

Figure 3.35: Setting the In-Band Control & Command over ATM and the Data service over ATM

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

283

¤ Setting the In-Band Control & Command over ATM The In-Band C&C setup menu is used to set In-Band connection parameters, i.e. the IP routing parameters (in the Global settings sub-panel) and the link parameters Activity, VPI, VCI, Netmask, Local Ip and Remote IP (in the Links list sub-panel) . These parameters can be found in the shortcut menu attached to the ATM port in the Identification page.

Figure 3.36: ATM In-Band C&C shortcut menus in the Identification main window

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

284

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.2 - Setup procedure steps

A detailed description of the In-Band connection commands will be given in section “In-Band Control & Command over ATM setup menu”, page 305. ¤ Setting the Data link over ATM The Data service feature consists of Ethernet bridging between NetProcessor Extension 1 port (configured as a 10/100 Ethernet port) and one ATM PVC. The following parameters need to be adjusted: • For Extension interface setup: Physical port label, Enable/Disable, Interface Speed / Mode. • For Data service setup: Data service mode, Label, Activity, Selected port, VPI, VCI, Rate. These parameters can be found in the Extension port setup menu and Data service setup menu, which are accessible from the shortcut menu attached to the Extension_1 port in the Identification page.

Figure 3.37: Extension Port 1 setup and Data service setup dialog boxes

A detailed description of the data service commands will be given in section “Data service over ATM menus”, page 308. NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

285

3.3 - INSTALLATION MENU

Figure 3.38: Shortcut commands attached to the Installation main menu

The Installation gives access to the Identification menu. This menu opens the Identification page (which is the home page) where NetProcessor’s front and back panels are displayed.

Figure 3.39: Identification page

The following sections will explain how to gain access to information: • via the LEDs; • by clicking on the panel charts; • via the shortcut commands attached to the connectors. 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

286

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

and also how to setup In-Band Control and Command over ATM and Data service over ATM.

3.3.1 - LEDs The three LEDs on the front panel indicate alarm severity.

LEDs Figure 3.40: LEDs on the chassis front panel LED POWER ALARM WARNING

Color green red orange

Description Device on Major alarm preventing operation Minor alarm not preventing operation or start-up phase

Click on the LED chart to directly access the Alarms page.

Figure 3.41: Alarm menu accessed by clicking on the LEDs

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

287

3.3.2 - Clicking on the panel charts ¤ Chassis technical information Click on the chassis chart to access the factory settings.

Figure 3.42: Clicking on the chassis

Figure 3.43: Chassis information

¤ Main Board technical information Click on the main board chart to access the factory settings.

Figure 3.44: Clicking on the main board

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

288

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

Figure 3.45: Main board information

¤ Extension Board technical information Click on the extension board chart to access the factory settings.

Figure 3.46: Clicking on the main board (ATM extension board, as an example)

Figure 3.47: Extension board information (ATM extension board, as an example) NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

289

3.3.3 - Shortcut commands attached to the connectors

ASI In/ASI Out boundary line is programmable

ATM extension board

ASI extension board

DVB-S DVB-S2 Front-End

Figure 3.48: Shortcut commands attached to the connectors

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

290

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

¤ ASI IN connector shortcut commands

Figure 3.49: Shortcut commands attached to an ASI IN connector

The Interface setup shortcut command is used to give a name to the input interface, enable or disable the interface and also set a delay for IP Flextream. For more details, refer to section “Interface setup menus”, page 327.

Figure 3.50: Interface configuration dialog box for an ASI IN connector

A green LED will be displayed on the right hand side of the connector when the ASI IN interface is enabled. If an alarm is raised, this LED will turn red and a new Alarms command will be displayed in the shortcut menu enabling the Operator to access the Alarms menu.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

291

The LED is green when the interface is enabled and off when the interface is disabled

with N903ASB0GB board 4 ASI inputs 4 ASI outputs

The LED will turn red as soon as an alarm is present on the interface. An Alarms shortcut command will be added to the shortcut menu. with N903ASB3GA board ASI IN / ASI OUT boundary line is programmable N ASI inputs

(10-N) ASI outputs

Board N903ASB3GA Arrow direction indicates if the ASI is programmed as input or output A red arrow indicates that or an alarm is present on the interface.

with N903ASB4GA board ASI IN / ASI OUT boundary line is programmable N ASI inputs

(10-N) ASI outputs

Board N903ASB4GA Arrow direction indicates if the ASI is programmed as input or output A red arrow indicates that or an alarm is present on the interface.

Figure 3.51: LEDs and arrows on the ASI connectors

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

292

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

¤ ASI OUT connector shortcut commands

Figure 3.52: Shortcut commands attached to an ASI OUT connector

The Interface setup shortcut command is used to give a name to the output interface, enable or disable the interface, set the packet size and the distribution mode. For more details, refer to section “Interface setup menus”, page 327.

Figure 3.53: Interface configuration dialog box for an ASI OUT connector

A green LED will be displayed on the right hand side of the connector when the ASI OUT interface is enabled. If an alarm is raised, this LED will turn red and a new Alarms command will be displayed in the shortcut menu enabling the Operator to access the Alarms menu. ¤ RF In connector shortcut commands

Figure 3.54: Shortcut command attached to the RF In connectors

The Interface setup shortcut command is used to give a name to the RF In interface, enable or disable the interface, enable or disable descrambling, select the signal (prior descrambling or after descrambling) to be sent to the ASI monitoring output, set the LNB parameters (Power, Polarity, Frequency range), set the frequency, select the DVB-S or DVB-S2 standard and set the parameters of the selected standard (Symbol rate, Demodulation scheme, Code rate, Roll-off, Pilot on/off). For more details, refer to section “RF In setup dialog boxes”, page 331.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

293

DVB-S

DVB-S2

Figure 3.55: RF In setup dialog box (DVB-S and DVB-S2)

¤ ATM port shortcut commands

Figure 3.56: Shortcut commands attached to an ATM port

The Interface setup shortcut command is used to give a name to the ATM port, enable or disable the port, set the Clock source (internal or recovered), set OAM activity and set STM1 or STS3c mode for SDH/SONET or Direct mapping for PDH E3 or DS3 mode or PLCP C-Bit parity (G804) for DS3 mode. For more details, refer to section “Interface setup menus”, page 327.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

294

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

Figure 3.57: Interface configuration dialog box for an ATM port

The ATM RX list shortcut command is used to show and edit the activity, VPI, VCI, FEC of the existing ATM connections and also set a delay for IP Flextream.

Figure 3.58: RX list for an ATM port

The ATM TX list shortcut command is used to show and edit the activity, VPI, VCI, FEC and bitrates of the existing ATM connections. For more details, refer to section “ATM Rx and ATM Tx setup menus”, page 351.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

295

Figure 3.59: TX list for an ATM port

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

296

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

The In-Band C&C setup shortcut command is used to set the In-Band connection parameters. For more details, refer to section “In-Band Control & Command over ATM setup menu”, page 305.

Figure 3.60: In-Band C&C setup with an ATM port

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

297

The Network ports counters shortcut command is used to consult ATM port information and statistics. For more details, refer to section “Network port counters menu”, page 585.

Figure 3.61: ATM port information and statistics

A green LED will be displayed on the right hand side of the connector when the ATM port is enabled. If an alarm is raised, this LED will turn red and a new Alarms command will be displayed in the shortcut menu enabling the Operator to access the Alarms menu.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

298

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

¤ EXT_1 port shortcut commands

Figure 3.62: Shortcut commands attached to the EXT_1 port

The Interface setup shortcut command is used to give a name to the interface, enable or disable the interface and select the interface speed/mode. For more details, refer to section “Extension port dialog box”, page 309.

Figure 3.63: Extension 1 port dialog box

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

299

The Data service shortcut command is used to select a data link (only one can be active at a time), give a name to the link, enable or disable the link and set the ATM connection parameters for this link (VCI, VPI, selected port). For more details, refer to section “Data service dialog box”, page 309.

Figure 3.64: Data service dialog boxes

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

300

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

¤ LAN/WAN port shortcut commands

Figure 3.65: Shortcut commands attached to the LAN/WAN ports

The Interface setup shortcut command is used to give a name to the LAN/WAN interface, enable or disable the interface when the interface has a nominal status, enable or disable the interface when the interface has a backup status, set the interface speed/mode, set the IP parameters (address and netmask), set the IGMP protocol, set the maximum output bitrate and configure the static routing or dynamic IP routing. For more details, refer to section “Interface setup menus”, page 327.

Figure 3.66: Interface configuration dialog box for LAN/WAN ports

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

301

The IP RX list shortcut command is used to give a name to the IP stream, set the activity, select the port (LAN/WAN1 or LAN/WAN2), set the Multicast IP address and UDP port, select the decapsulation scheme (MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP or MPEG/UDP/IP), enable or disable the FEC, set the Requested IPDV Tolerance and Reordering Tolerance, set the Clock recovery mode, set the rate value, set the SFN Headroom and set a delay for IP Flextream. For more details, refer to section “IP Rx and IP Tx setup menus”, page 356.

Figure 3.67: RX list for LAN/WAN ports

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

302

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

The IP TX list shortcut command is used to give a name to the IP stream, set the activity, select the port (LAN/WAN1 or LAN/WAN2), set the destination parameters (IP address and UDP port, Use ARP, Destination MAC address and Source IP address), set the QoS parameters (TOS, Diffserv label, QOS tagging and User Priority), set the VLAN ID, select the encapsulation scheme (MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP or MPEG/UDP/IP), select the number of MPEG packets per IP frame, enable or disable FEC and set FEC parameters. For more details, refer to section “IP Rx and IP Tx setup menus”, page 356.

Figure 3.68: TX list for LAN/WAN ports

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

303

The Network ports counters shortcut command is used to consult IP port information and statistics. For more details, refer to section “Network port counters menu”, page 585.

WAN port counters

Figure 3.69: IP WAN port information and statistics

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

304

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

¤ PPS GPS port shortcut commands

Figure 3.70: Shortcut commands attached to the GPS PPS port

The Interface setup shortcut command is used to give a name to the interface, enable or disable the interface and select the active edge (Falling or Rising). This information is required to synchronize MIP insertion by the SFN adapter. For more details, refer to section “GPS PPS setup dialog box”, page 349.

Figure 3.71: Interface configuration dialog box for GPS PPS port

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

305

3.3.4 - In-Band Control & Command over ATM setup menu

Figure 3.72: ATM In-Band C&C shortcut menus in the Identification main window

The In-Band C&C setup menu is used to set In-Band connection over ATM parameters, i.e. the IP routing parameters (in the Global settings sub-panel) and the link parameters Activity, VPI, VCI, Netmask, Local Ip and Remote IP (in the Links list sub-panel) .

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

306

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

3.3.4.1 - Global settings sub-panel

Figure 3.73: In-Band C&C setup with an ATM extension board Global setup (IP routing)

Here can be entered up to four IP static routes (Destination address, Subnet mask and Gateway address).

3.3.4.2 - Links list sub-panel

Figure 3.74: In-Band C&C setup with an ATM extension board Links list

Check the Edit box to the right of the corresponding row in the ATM Links list area.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

307

The following dialog box will be displayed:

Figure 3.75: ATM Control In-Band setup dialog box

Label, Activity, Selected port, VPI, VCI Description of the ATM VCC channel to be used as a connection for data where 0 ≤ VPI ≤ 255 and 32 ≤ VCI ≤ 63. Local IP and Netmask IP address and subnet mask of the local NetProcessor in the ATM IP subnet. Remote IP

IP address of the remote ATM device in the ATM IP subnet (another NetProcessor, a router or a PC).

Rate

Maximum data rate is configurable. It is recommended to set the data rate in the range 0,1 to 2 Mbps. Nevertheless data rate can be set up to 20 Mbps but high data rate on this service can noticeably slow down product configuration time.

CMD1, CMD2, LAN/WAN1, LAN/WAN2, and the two IP over ATM interfaces are all IP interfaces of the product and are mapped on a unique IP stack. Any overlap between the 6 IP subnets can disable access to the product.

IP over ATM setup requires a clear IP subnetting strategy. All paths must be explicitly routed (both ways!). Remember to enter routes on other hosts also. 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

308

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

3.3.5 - Data service over ATM menus The Data service menus are the Extension port setup menu and Data service setup menu, which are accessible from the shortcut menu attached to the Extension_1 port on the Identification page.

Figure 3.76: Extension Port 1 setup and Data service setup dialog boxes in the Identification page NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

309

3.3.5.1 - Extension port dialog box

Figure 3.77: Extension 1 port dialog box

Physical port label

A name can be given to the port. It will be used to identify the port for alarms or monitoring. If left empty, the interface will be identified as the Extension port#1 default value.

Enabled

The port can be enabled/disabled. If disabled, the port will not send any streams, but its settings are maintained within the current configuration.

Interface speed/mode You are advised to leave speed and mode as negotiated.

3.3.5.2 - Data service dialog box

Figure 3.78: Data service dialog box

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

310

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

In the Global setup area, Data service mode

Choice between None and Data over ATM

In the ATM links list area, two data links are proposed but only one can be active at any time. To edit or change the parameters of an ATM link used for the data service, check the Edit box on the right of the corresponding row on the ATM links list window.

Figure 3.79: Data service dialog box

Set the connection parameters as usual (see“ATM Rx and ATM Tx setup menus”, page 351).

1. Traffic contract is UBR and peak rate is set to enable carriage of the selected Ethernet rate (when frame size equals MTU). 2. Possible values for VPI and VCI are: 0 ≤ VPI ≤ 255 and 32 ≤ VCI ≤ 63).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

311

3.4 - CONFIGURATION MENU

Figure 3.80: Shortcut commands attached to the Configuration menu

The Configuration menu gives access to the following sub-menus: • Top view; • Processing; • Stored configurations.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

312

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

The Top view and Processing sub-menus are used for NetProcessor configuration.

Operation

Sub-menu

Setting the ASI, ATM, Gigabit Ethernet, DVB-S / DVB-S2 Front-End and Data injection interface static configuration.

Top view

Setting the Tx and Rx dynamic network communication parameters

Top view

Setting the Multiplexer inputs Creating and Setting the Multiplexer outputs Connecting the Multiplexer outputs to the physical interfaces Setting the preprocessing, e.g.

Top view and Processing Processing Top view Processing

• Setting the descrambling, • Setting the service redundancy; Setting the service processing, e.g.

Processing

• Setting the multiplexing feature by adding TS, adding services, adding components, creating local service, remapping SID and PID, • Setting the SFN adapter, • Managing Bitrate management with Automatic Component Filtering policy, • Setting the service substitution; Setting the video processing, e.g.

Processing

• Setting the Splicing feature; • Setting the Rate shaping feature (Transrating) from CBR/VBR to Capped VBR or from CBR/VBR to VBR services with statistical multiplexing; Setting the global settings, e.g.

Processing

• Setting the scrambling feature (in internal SCS mode), • Installing the GPI devices; Setting the automation Injecting data

Processing Top view

The Stored configurations sub-menu is used to save and load customized configurations. NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

313

3.4.1 - Top view and processing sub-menus 3.4.1.1 - Top view sub-menu The Top view sub-menu displays the Top view chart:

Figure 3.81: Top view chart

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

314

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

3.4.1.2 - Processing sub-menu The Processing sub-menu opens the NetProcessor Processing window:

Figure 3.82: NetProcessor Processing window

As most of the configuration operations will be performed in this window, it will be first introduced in the next section.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

315

3.4.1.2.1 - Sub-windows The NetProcessor Processing window features 3 sub-windows:

Figure 3.83: Service Processing window

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

316

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

3.4.1.2.1.1 - Monitoring sub-window ¤ Panels The Monitoring sub-window is divided into two panels. The top one displays a description of the device’s input streams as a tree structure (this is a Drag area). The bottom one is used to monitor the stream being formed (to get the TS output monitoring view, you must connect the TS stream to a physical output as described in section “Connecting the Multiplexer output TS to the physical interfaces (ASI Out, ATM, Gigabit Ethernet)”, page 381). This sub-window can be resized both horizontally and vertically.

All Mutiplexer inputs (after preprocessing)

One of the Multiplexer output (the one selected in the Configuration sub-window)

Figure 3.84: Monitoring view tree

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

317

¤ Multiplexing monitoring The Multiplexing monitoring uses the following structure and elements: • The root node of the input monitoring tree represents the NetProcessor equipment. - Label: device name, - Icon: equipment , - Children: Multiplexer inputs; • The root node of the output monitoring tree represents the Multiplexer output which is currently selected for configuration. • A Multiplexer interface node represents a Multiplexer input or output. -

Label: Multiplexer interface label, Details: the carried TS ID, and the label of the connected transport layer(s), Icon: its direction (input , output ), Grayed if the Multiplexer interface is not connected to a transport layer, or connected to a disabled transport layer, - Children: one node for signalling tables, followed by services carried by the TS; • A service node represents a regular service (declared in PAT) or a pseudo-service containing EMM or ghost components. - Label: for a pseudo-service, the type of contained components; otherwise, the service name (in DVB context) or an arbitrary label, - Details: the service_ID, the PID carrying the service PMT, and the PID of the TS packets which contain the PCR fields for the service, - Icon: service category (deduced from service type: Private , Video , Audio , Mosaic , Teletext ) and input scrambling state , - Grayed if the service is not actually broadcast, - Tool-tip: for regular services, the service type (in DVB context), - Children: ECM components associated to the service, followed by service components; • A component node represents a regular component (component from a regular service), a ghost component or an EMM component. - Label: for a regular component, its stream type, - Details: component PID, and component tag (if any, for a regular component), 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

318

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

- Icon: component category (deduced from stream type: Private , Video , Audio , Teletext ), PCR carrying state , scrambling state , and sharing state , - Grayed if the component is not actually broadcast, - Children: ECM components associated to the (regular) component.

¤ ECM monitoring

Figure 3.85: ECM monitoring

The ECM monitoring uses the following structure and elements: • An ECM component node represents a component whose PID is referenced by a CA-descriptor associated to a given service or component. -

Label: ECM component PID, Icon: ECM component , Grayed if the component is not actually broadcast, Children: ECM channels for the current service or component and the current ECM PID;

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

319

• An ECM channel node represents the couple of a CA-descriptor associated to a given service or component. - Label: CA System ID (in hexadecimal format), - Icon: ECM channel , - Tool-tip: CA System ID (in decimal format). On a Multiplexer input, if ECM cleaning (pre-processing operation) is enabled, ECM components are not visible. ¤ Signalling monitoring

Figure 3.86: Signalling monitoring

The signalling monitoring uses the following structure and elements: • A signalling node is present under each Multiplexer interface. - Label: “Signalling tables”, - Icon: signalling tables , - Children: monitored signalling tables;

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

320

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

• A signalling table node represents a set of monitored sub-tables which belongs to the same table (i.e. has the same table ID, except for EIT Schedule Actual, EIT Schedule Other and Private tables). -

Label: table name acronym, or “Private tables”, Details: number of sub-tables, Icon: signalling table , Children: monitored signalling sub-tables belonging to that table;

• A signalling sub-table node represents a monitored sub-table. - Label: table format name (identical to the table name acronym, except for NIT, EIT, SDT), or “Private”, - Details: PID, table ID (as appropriate) and table ID extensions (with short labels); values in decimal format (see full description below), - Icon: signalling sub-table , - Tool-tip: PID, table ID and table ID extensions (with long labels); values in both decimal and hexadecimal formats;

PID

Table ID

Table ID extensions

PAT

*

TS id

CAT

*

Program number **

PMT

X

NIT

*

Network ID

SDT

*

TS ID, ON ID

BAT

*

Bouquet ID

EIT P/F

*

Service ID, TS ID, ON ID

EIT Schedule

*

TDT

*

TOT

*

SCTE35 SIT

X

Private tables

X

X

Service ID, TS ID, ON ID

X

* When the table PID is different than the one defined by the standard, it is always displayed. ** On a DVB equipment, PMT's "Program number" is displayed as "Service ID". NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

321

3.4.1.2.1.2 - Configuration sub-window Tabs of the following pages: Global settings, Automation, Mux I/O, Preprocessing, Service processing, Video processing

Tabs of one or more panels

Panes

Figure 3.87: Pages, panels and panes

The Configuration sub-window can be resized both horizontally and vertically. The left and right panes can be resized horizontally. The Configuration sub-window is split into 6 pages: • the Global setting page is made of two panels, Scrambling and GPI device installation: - The Scrambling panel is used to setup the internal SCS for standalone NetProcessor (see section “Scrambling”, page 532). - The GPI device installation panel is used to install external GPI devices.

• the Automation page is made of two panels, Actions and Triggers. These panels are used to indicate the GPI contacts of the GPI devices which will trigger Service redundancy switch-overs, Service substitution switch-overs, Splice switch-overs (see section “Automation”, page 547).

• the Mux I/O page is made of two panels, Multiplexer inputs and Multiplexer outputs: - The Multiplexer inputs panel is used to set the input TS label, stop the incoming ECM related to descrambled services or components (if required), 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

322

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

set the signalling mode (ISO, DVB, CUSTOM), extract and set the recurrence survey periodicity of incoming tables, set the transmission mode Transparent or SI driven - (see section “Setting the Multiplexer input TS configuration”, page 369). - The Multiplexer outputs panel is used to create the Multiplexer output TSs (see section “Creating the Multiplexer output TS”, page 377).

• the Preprocessing page is made of two panels, Descrambling and Service redundancy: - The Descrambling panel is used for the DVB-S/DVB-S2 Front-End to descramble any of the two incoming inputs using a CAM module (see section “Descrambling”, page 383). - The Service redundancy panel is used to define a "back-up" service for any input service which is multiplexed in the NetProcessor (see section “Service redundancy”, page 387).

• the Service processing page is made of two panels, Multiplexing and Substitution: - The Multiplexing panel is used to build the output TSs (see section “Building a multiplex: Use cases”, page 468). - The Substitution page is used to setup the substitution feature which can be seen as an alternative to splicing. Instead of processing the video and audio elementary streams, the service substitution relies on a PMT table change which actually brings about a kind of channel zapping in the receiver. Unlike splicing, the service substitution results in video and audio PID modifications which are signaled in a new PMT version (see section “Service Substitution”, page 495).

• the Video processing page is made of two panels, Splice and Transrate: - The Splice panel is used to select the streams to be spliced and how they will be spliced (see section “Splice setup”, page 503). - The Transrate panel is used to perform Transrating (also called Rate shaping) either from CBR/VBR to Capped VBR (this type of Transrating is NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

323

also called "Clamping") or from CBR/VBR to VBR with statistical multiplexing (see section “Transrate setup”, page 517).

3.4.1.2.1.3 - Alarm and Service replacement monitoring sub-window This sub-window can be resized vertically. The Alarms and Service Replacement Monitoring sub-window is split into 3 pages: • The Alarm page displays the status of alarms corresponding to the selected output.

Figure 3.88: Alarm page

• The Redundancy monitoring page displays the log of redundancy switch-overs.

Figure 3.89: Redundancy monitoring page

• The Substitution monitoring page displays the log of service substitution switch-overs.

Figure 3.90: Substitution monitoring page

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

324

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

• The Warning page displays the log of warnings (e.g. PID conflict). Warnings are displayed when checking the configuration by using the Check button.

After a check

Figure 3.91: Warning page

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

325

3.4.1.2.2 - Help, Save, Check and Apply buttons These buttons can be found in the right upper corner of the NetProcessor Processing window. 3.4.1.2.2.1 - Help button The Help button opens a multi-panel window which provides the meaning of each icon used in the different NetProcessor Processing sub-windows.

Figure 3.92: Help menu

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

326

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

3.4.1.2.2.2 - Save, Check and Apply buttons Once edited, a configuration can be applied by clicking on , or checked without being applied by clicking on or saved without being applied by clicking on . In the latter case, a file browser is launched to select a free slot where the full NetProcessor configuration (including I/O setup, Service Processing, etc.) will be stored.

Save

Check

Apply

Figure 3.93: Saving/Checking/Applying a configuration

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

327

3.4.1.3 - Setting the physical interface static configuration 3.4.1.3.1 - Interface setup menus

Figure 3.94: Interface setup shortcut menus in the Top View

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

328

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

3.4.1.3.2 - ASI setup dialog boxes 3.4.1.3.2.1 - Overview With the optional ASI module N903ASB0GB, NetProcessor features four DVB-ASI standard TS coaxial inputs and four independent ASI outputs. Four ASI inputs

Four ASI outputs

Figure 3.95: N903ASB0GB option

With the optional ASI module N903ASB3GA and N903ASB4GA, NetProcessor features ten DVB-ASI standard TS coaxial ports in compliance with CENELEC EN 50083-9 (DVB - PI). The number of ASI inputs / ASI outputs can be programmed via the CLI interface (see section “Editing the number of ASI inputs for ASI FLEX board (sasiin)”, page 209). All output ports are grouped on the right hand side of the strip. ASI IN / ASI OUT boundary line is programmable N ASI inputs

N ASI inputs

(10-N) ASI outputs

(10-N) ASI outputs

Figure 3.96: N903ASB3GA and N903ASB4GA board

With the optional extension module N903ASE0GA, the number of ASI inputs can be increased from 10 to 22 (= 10 ASI IN with N903ASB3GA or N903ASB4GA option + 12 optional ASI IN with this option) or 4 to 16 (= 4 ASI IN with N903ASB0GB option + 12 optional ASI IN with this option).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

329

12 ASI inputs

Figure 3.97: N903ASE0GA option

3.4.1.3.2.2 - ASI In setup dialog box

Figure 3.98: ASI In setup dialog box - Basic page

Label

A name can be given to the interface. It will be used to identify the port for alarms or monitoring. If left empty, the interface will be identified by the ASI In x default value.

Enabled Yes/No

The interface can be enabled/disabled. A disabled interface will not be able to send or receive any streams.

Figure 3.99: ASI In setup dialog box - Advanced page

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

330

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

Delay

The delay can be enabled/disabled. The delay is aimed to compensate the video network latency when NetProcessor is used in IP Flextream mode (TS coming from the nearest Encoder receives a long delay while the TS coming from the most distant Encoder receives no delay).

Delay value

The delay can be set between 0 and 300 ms.

3.4.1.3.2.3 - ASI Out setup dialog box

Figure 3.100: ASI Out setup dialog box

Label

A name can be given to the interface. It will be used to identify the port for alarms or monitoring. If left empty, the interface will be identified by the ASI Out x default value.

Enabled Yes/No

The interface can be enabled/disabled. A disabled interface will not be able to send or receive any streams.

Packet size

The packets feature 188 or 188 + 16 bytes. In the second case, 16 additional bytes of random value are included for the Reed-Solomon error-correcting code inserted by the modulators.

Distribution

The ASI distribution mode can be set to Byte (Data bursts, i-e individual bytes spread out in time) or Packet (Data packets, i-e burst of contiguous bytes).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

331

3.4.1.3.3 - RF In setup dialog boxes The RF In interface setup menu can be accessed either from the ASI interface setup shortcut menu of the Top view chart in the Configuration page or from the NetProcessor rear panel in the Identification page.

Access from the Top view chart in the Configuration page

Access from the rear panel in the Identification page

Figure 3.101: Access to the RF In interface setup menu

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

332

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

The following dialog box will be displayed for each RF input: For DVB-S

Figure 3.102: RF In setup dialog box (DVB-S)

For DVB-S2

Figure 3.103: RF In setup dialog box (DVB-S2)

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

333

The Operator can set the following parameters for each tuner/demodulator: Label

A name can be given to the interface. It will be used to identify the port for alarms or monitoring. If left empty, the interface will be identified by the RF Port #1 or RF Port #2 default value.

Enabled

The interface can be enabled/disabled. A disabled interface will not be able to demodulate any RF signal.

Descrambling enable Set to Yes to route the stream to the CAM module. Descrambling configuration must be cleared prior to disable descrambling on the RF port. ASI output through CAM module If set to Yes, the ASI monitoring output will reflect the stream coming from the CAM (if descrambling is enabled). If set to No, the ASI monitoring output will reflect the stream coming from the demodulator. Standard

Choice between DVB-S and DVB-S2.

Frequency

Value adjustable between from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz.

LNB Power

Head alimentation can be enabled or disabled.

Polarity

Choice between Vertical -13V and Horizontal -18V

Frequency range

Choice between High Band (22 kHz) and Low Band (no 22 kHz).

The other parameters depend on the selected Standard (DVB-S or DVB-S2). Refer to ETSI EN 300421 (DVB-S) and ETSI EN 302307 (DVB-S2) for an explanation of these fields. For DVB-S, - Symbol Rate: 5 to 45 MBauds, - Demodulation: QPSK, - Code rate: Auto, 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8,

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

334

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

For DVB-S2, - Symbol Rate: 7 to 30 MBauds, - Demodulation: QPSK / 8PSK, - Code rate: 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10 for QPSK modulation and 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10 for 8PSK modulation, - Roll-off: 0.35, 0.25, 0.20 - Pilot: On/Off

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

335

3.4.1.3.4 - ATM setup dialog boxes The interface setup menu can be accessed either on the "input side" or on the "output side" of the Top view chart.

same shortcut same shortcut

input side

output side

Figure 3.104: Two ways of accessing the Port ATM#x setup dialog box

The Port ATM # x Setup shortcut command will display the following dialog box:

Figure 3.105: ATM Port setup dialog box (Basic page)

Figure 3.106: ATM Port setup dialog box (Advanced page)

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

336

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

All the standard ATM interface parameters can be set via the Basic dialog boxes: naming the interface, enabling/disabling the interface, selecting the clock source, enabling or disabling OAM activity and selecting SDH Mode. Label

A name can be given to the interface. It will be used to identify the port for alarms or monitoring. If left empty, the interface will be identified by the Port ATM #1 or Port ATM #2 default value.

Enabled Yes/No

The interface can be enabled/disabled. A disabled interface will not be able to send or receive any streams.

Clock Source

Choice between Internal and Recovered. Internal: the transmit clock is derived from a + 20ppm local oscillator. Recovered: the transmit clock is derived from the received signal. This must be used when connected to an ADM (Add and Drop Multiplexer).

OAM Activity

Choice between Yes and No. Yes: far end received failure/block error bits are managed. This should be used with a duplex connection to an ADM or a switch. No: far end received failure/block error bits are not set in transmitted SDH frame overheads. This must be used when interconnection is one way only to avoid alarm detection on the facing device.

Mode

Choice between STM1 and STS3c. STM1: regular STM1 frame. STS3c: SONET frame. This setting must be used when NetProcessor is connected to a SONET network. If you do not know which type of frame is required, choose STS3c.

The Advanced dialog box gives access to non standard ATM settings. Loopback mode

Keep this parameter value at its default value (Normal - No loopback) except if you want to prevent unwanted alarms on an ATM PDH Tx only interface:

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

337

Scrambling

Unless you know and master this setting, keep this parameter value at its default value (Yes).

Cosset

Unless you know and master this setting, keep this parameter value at its default value (Yes).

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

338

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

3.4.1.3.5 - IP setup dialog boxes The interface setup menu can be accessed either on the "input side" or on the "output side" of the Top view chart.

input side

output side

same shortcut same shortcut

Figure 3.107: Two ways of accessing the LAN/WAN port x setup dialog box

The LAN/WAN port # x shortcut command will display the following dialog box:

Figure 3.108: Interface configuration dialog box for the LAN/WAN interface

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

339

First page Basic Physical port label

A name can be given to the interface. It will be used to identify the port for alarms or monitoring. If left empty, the interface will be identified by the LAN/WAN1 or LAN/WAN2 default value.

Operation status and Interface nominal status When NetProcessor is set to active (nominal) mode, this LAN/WAN interface can be enabled/disabled via this command. Interface backup status When NetProcessor is set to standby mode (after a switchover for system redundancy purposes), this LAN/WAN interface can be left unchanged (enabled) or disabled using this command, depending on Operator preference. Interface speed/mode, IP address and Netmask These are standard IP device parameters. You are recommended to leave speed/mode set to Autonegotiation. Set your IP subnet carefully. This port and the CMD ports must be part of different IP subnets, without overlaps. IGMP protocol handling In multicast mode, NetProcessor will automatically manage IGMP join and leave for seamless operation in real scale IP networks. The Operator chooses which type of IGMP protocol should be used by NetProcessor: • IGMPv2, • IGMPv3 partial with no source control, • IGMPv3 with SSM (Source Specific Multicast which is an IP technology where the destination host can select a source when joining a multicast group). Setting proper IGMP version is recommended as it speeds up NetProcessor start time. If detected network capabilities are below level set by Operator (e.g. network is using IGMPv2 while IGMPv3 is selected), NetProcessor automatically falls back to network supported version of IGMP.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

340

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

Shaping and Maximum output bitrate Shaping can be applied at output to prevent network overload. This is useful when you know that there is a fixed rate limit in the network after NetProcessor, directly below the visible line rate. Leave Shaping disabled in any other case. No configuration is associated with the SFP module. The port will automatically use SFP when a module is detected AND RJ45 is left unconnected. If both are connected, the RJ45 attachment has priority over the SFP. SFP is 1000Base-X and compatible with auto-negotiation and 1000Mbps Full Duplex speed modes only. The second page Routing is used to select the dynamic routing protocol and set up to 4 static routing entries.

Figure 3.109: Routing setup dialog box (Routing page)

Dynamic IP routing

Two routing protocols are available for dynamic routing: RIPv2 and OSPF. Leave as None if no dynamic routing protocol is used.

Static IP routing

Up to 4 static routes can be entered. NetProcessor will only accept gateways that are directly reachable via the Gigabit Ethernet port (i.e. gateway address must belong to port IP subnet). To clear a route entry, clear each of the 3 fields and apply the changes.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

341

The third page, RIPv2, is only visible if the RIPv2 dynamic routing protocol is selected in the Dynamic IP routing field.

Figure 3.110: Routing setup dialog box (RIPv2 page)

This page is used to set the following RIPv2 routing protocol parameters: • • • • • •

Route Update frequency, Route disable Time out, Route Garbage Time Out, Authentication mode (None, Text, MD5), Password, MD5 key id (Secret key used to encrypt passwords through MD5. This field is only available if MD5 mode is selected).

Refer to RFC 2453 for an explanation of these fields.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

342

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

The fourth page, OSPF, is only visible if the OSPF dynamic routing protocol is selected in the Dynamic IP routing field.

Figure 3.111: Routing setup dialog box (OSPF page)

This page is used to set the following OSPF routing protocol parameters: • • • • • • •

Area Stub area Hello Generation Frequency Route Disable Time Out Authentication mode (None, Text, MD5 Key) Password, MD5 key id (Secret key used to encrypt passwords through MD5. This field is only available if MD5 mode is selected).

Refer to RFC 2328 for an explanation of these fields.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

343

3.4.1.3.6 - Data injection setup dialog boxes Click on the Injected stream list shortcut command in the Top view chart to display the current injected stream list.

Figure 3.112: Access to Data setup dialog box (Injected stream list empty)

Click on one of the following three Add an injected stream links: EMMG/PDG, PSIG or PITG according to the protocol used for injection.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

344

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

Figure 3.113: Injected data dialog box

Label

A name can be given to the stream. It will be used to identify the stream when attaching the stream to a Multiplexer output TS using the data injection wizard. If left empty, a default value will be entered by the system (example: IS EMMG/PDG #x).

Min rate

This parameter sets the minimum data injection bitrate for the data channel. An alarm is raised if this rate is not respected.

Max rate

This parameter sets the maximum data injection bitrate for the data channel. An alarm is raised if the data injection bitrate exceeds Max rate.

The other parameters depend on the protocol selected.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

345

For an EMMG/PDG stream, the following parameters have to be set:

Figure 3.114: EMMG/PDG dialog box

Client ID

Identifier set on the DVB injector. In the case of an EMM channel, this identifier must take the SuperCAS_id parameter value supplied by the CAS (for SuperCAS_id definitions, see the standard ETSI TS 103 197 DVB: Head-end implementation of DVB SimulCrypt).

Data ID

This identification is used to distinguish between different private components from the same injector. This value must be identical to the one used at the source end.

Data injection mode

Choice between CBR and Opportunistic data.

Data injection type

Choice between Full TCP and TCP/UDP.

UDP port

Number of the UDP port on which the device is listening.

Stream type

Choice between Video (0x00), Video (0x02), Audio (0x03), Audio (0x04), Private sections (0x05), Private data (0x06), MHEG (0x07), DSM-CC (0x08), H.222.1 (0x09), Type A (0x0A), Type B (0x0B), Type C (0x0C), Type D (0x0D), Auxiliary (0x0E).

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

346

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

For a PSIG stream, the following parameters have to be set:

Figure 3.115: PSIG dialog box

Transport Stream ID and Network ID As the PSIG is responsible for generating the PSI, knowledge of the Transport Stream is required. For a PITG stream, the following parameter has to be set:

Figure 3.116: PITG dialog box

Transport Stream ID As the PITG is responsible for generating the PSI, knowledge of the Transport Stream is required.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

347

Click on the Data injection global configuration shortcut command in the Top view chart to display a dialog box that will enable the Operator to set the TCP ports used for data injection.

Figure 3.117: Access to Data injection global configuration dialog box

EMM/PDG Service port TCP connection port used for EMMG/PDG based injection (default value is 32000). PSIG Service port

TCP connection port used for PSIG based injection (default value is 34000).

PITG Service port

TCP connection port used for PITG based injection (default value is 33000).

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

348

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

When ATSC is enabled through the CLI, the data injection setup is used to declare the PEARL server which will inject the PSIP sub-tables.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

349

3.4.1.3.7 - GPS PPS setup dialog box The GPS PPS interface setup menu can be accessed from the NetProcessor rear panel in the Identification page.

Figure 3.118: Access to the GPS PPS interface setup menu

The Interface setup shortcut command is used to give a name to the interface, enable or disable the interface and select the active edge (Falling or Rising). This information is required to synchronize MIP insertion by the SFN adapter.

Figure 3.119: Interface configuration dialog box for GPS PPS interface

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

350

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

3.4.1.4 - Setting the Tx and Rx dynamic network communication parameters

Figure 3.120: ATM Rx setup, ATM Tx setup and IP Rx setup, IP Tx setup dialog boxes via the ATM Rx list, ATM Tx list and IP Rx list, IP Tx list views

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

351

3.4.1.4.1 - ATM Rx and ATM Tx setup menus

Figure 3.121: ATM Rx and Tx setup shortcut menus in the Top View

MPEG over ATM adaptation may provide: • simultaneous emission of up to 4 MPEG streams and reception of up to 4 MPEG streams with the N903PDH0GA E3/DS3 and N903STMSGA STM/SONET interface boards. • simultaneous emission of up to N MPEG streams and reception of up to (10-N) MPEG streams with the N903STMFGA interface board. The total number of transmitted and received MPEG streams may also be limited by the software option installed in the device.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

352

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

3.4.1.4.1.1 - ATM Rx list and ATM Rx setup dialog box

Figure 3.122: ATM Rx list

To add a new ATM Rx stream to be processed, use the Add a new Rx link at the bottom of the same list. To change the parameters of an existing ATM connection, check the Edit box to the right of the corresponding row in the ATM RX list window. In both cases, the following ATM RX setup dialog box will be displayed:

Figure 3.123: ATM RX setup dialog box - Basic page

Label

A name can be given to the channel. It will be used to identify the port for alarms or monitoring. If left empty, the interface will be identified by the ATM RX default value.

Activity

The channel can be enabled/disabled. A disabled channel will not extract any streams, but its settings will be maintained within the current configuration.

Selected port

Choose which port should be used for ATM connections. Avoid leaving the Port set to None for an enabled channel.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

353

VPI

The authorized range is 0 to 255.

VCI

The authorized range is 32 to 65535.

FEC

Select Yes if you want to use error correction.

Figure 3.124: ATM RX setup dialog box - Advanced page

Delay

The delay can be enabled/disabled. The delay is aimed to compensate the video network latency when NetProcessor is used in IP Flextream mode (TS coming from the nearest Encoder receives a long delay while the TS coming from the most distant Encoder receives no delay).

Delay value

The delay can be set between 0 and 300ms.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

354

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

3.4.1.4.1.2 - ATM Tx list and ATM Tx setup dialog box

Figure 3.125: ATM TX list

To add a new ATM Tx stream to be processed, use the Add a new Tx link at the bottom of the same list. To change the parameters of an ATM TX connection, check the Edit box to the right of the corresponding row in the ATM TX list window. In both cases, the following ATM TX setup dialog box will be displayed:

Figure 3.126: ATM Tx setup dialog box

Label

A name can be given to the channel. It will be used to identify the port for alarms or monitoring. If left empty, the interface will be identified by the ATM TX default value.

Activity

The channel can be enabled/disabled. A disabled channel will not send any streams, but its settings will be maintained within the current configuration.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

355

Selected port

Choose which port should be used for streaming. Avoid leaving the Port set to None for an enabled channel.

VPI

The authorized range is 0 to 255.

VCI

The authorized range is 32 to 65535.

FEC

Select Yes if you want to use error correction.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

356

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

3.4.1.4.2 - IP Rx and IP Tx setup menus

Figure 3.127: IP Rx and Tx setup shortcut menus in the Top View

MPEG over IP adaptation provides simultaneous reception of up to 64 MPEG streams and transmission of up to 12 MPEG streams without the streaming option or 128 MPEG streams with the streaming option (N903S1PSAA or N903S1FSAA), all shared out on the 2 Gigabit Ethernet ports. The total number of transmitted and received MPEG streams may also be limited by the software option installed in the device.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

357

3.4.1.4.2.1 - IP Rx list and IP Rx setup dialog box

Figure 3.128: IP Rx list

To add a new IP Rx stream to be processed, use the Add a new Rx link at the bottom of the same list. To change the parameters of an existing IP connection, check the Edit box to the right of the corresponding row in the IP RX list window. In both cases, the following IP RX setup dialog box will be displayed:

Figure 3.129: IP RX setup dialog box - Transport layer page

Label

A name can be given to the channel. It will be used to identify the port for alarms or monitoring. If left empty, the interface will be identified by the IP RX default value.

Activity

The channel can be enabled/disabled. A disabled channel will not extract any streams, but its settings will be maintained within the current configuration.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

358

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

Selected port

Choose which port should be used to receive the IP streams. Avoid leaving the Port set to None for an enabled channel.

Multicast destination IP address In unicast mode, this destination IP address should be left empty. NetProcessor will automatically use the selected port’s native address in this case. In multicast mode, the multicast IP address has to be entered. NetProcessor will automatically manage IGMP join and leave for seamless operation in real scale IP networks. Source IP address

Enter a Source IP address for secure or backup operation. When an IGMPv3 environment is selected and detected (see IGMP protocol handling, page 339), Source Specific Multicast is used for each stream that has been set by the Operator with a source IP address (Source Specific Multicast is an IP technology where the destination host can select a source when joining a multicast group enabling NetProcessor to switch to a designated backup source). When an IGMPv2 environment is selected and detected, (see IGMP protocol handling, page 339), the source IP address can be set but has a different meaning. When set, the NetProcessor will activate a filter to reject frames coming from unexpected sources, while IGMP join/leave are of any source type.

Reception UDP port The Reception UDP port enables stream discrimination. Reminder: standard RTP usage is based on 4 contiguous UDP port numbers, this one being the first. You are also recommended to start from port 49152 to avoid conflict with any standard protocol-allocated port numbers. It is a good practice to always use a +6 increment (or +10 for readability).

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

359

OR

OR

Figure 3.130: IP RX setup dialog box - Adaptation layer page

RX Decapsulation

Selection of the decapsulation scheme between MPEG/UDP/IP and MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP. Otherwise, the receiver automatically adapts to the received frame length.

RX FEC module

To be set to Enable if FEC usage is required. No other parameter is required as the receiver automatically adapts to the received FEC scheme.

Requested IPDV Tolerance....At nominal rate The jitter removal buffer is sized from entered IPDV tolerance and rate. The buffer is sized to cope with set IPDV at the set rate. The rate does not need to perfectly match the received signal rate but it should not be underestimated (risk of overflow) or overestimated (because of excessive delay).

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

360

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

Reordering Tolerance This parameter is greyed out as it cannot be adjusted. When FEC error correction is activated, reordering process is able to recover any ordering within a window of one FEC matrix plus 10 frames. Clock recovery and Rate value: Three clock recovery modes are available: • Adaptive clock recovery mode: In this mode, the TS rate recovery mechanism uses PCR present in the TS. • Fixed rate mode: Some streams do not include any PCR, (e.g. some pure DVB-H streams). That is the reason why this mode has been implemented. In Fixed rate mode, received TS is expected to be within + 30ppm of the entered nominal rate Fixed rate value. • Rate limiter only mode: This mode is designed to handle any traffic with unspecified (or poor) rate stability. In this mode no clock recovery is performed. As the IP frame groups multiple TS packets, a de-burst must be performed. The Rate Value parameter is used for this packet spacing. It specifies the maximum instantaneous rate that is allowed. This rate should be just above input worst-case. If the received signal rate is constant but not stable, 500ppm or more should be added to the nominal rate in most cases. If the received signal rate is not at all constant, 500ppm or more should be added to the maximum rate. When this mode is used, PCR inaccuracy induced by transport delay variations cannot be corrected. PCR accuracy is definitively lost on received services. The IPDV setting is still used in "Rate limiter only" mode as a packet timeout. Packets that are still in buffer IPDV time after their entry are discarded. For very shaky traffic, it is advisable to set IPDV to 200ms.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

361

Figure 3.131: IP RX setup dialog box - Advanced page

Delay

The delay can be enabled/disabled. The delay is aimed to compensate the video network latency when NetProcessor is used in IP Flextream mode (TS coming from the nearest Encoder receives a long delay while the TS coming from the most distant Encoder receives no delay).

Delay value

The delay can be set between 0 and 300ms.

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

362

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

3.4.1.4.2.2 - IP Tx list and IP Tx setup dialog box

Figure 3.132: IP TX list

To add a new IP Tx stream, use the Add a new Tx link at the bottom of the same list. To change the parameters of an IP connection, check the Edit box to the right of the corresponding row in the IP TX list window. In both cases, the following IP TX setup dialog box will be displayed:

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

363

The Transport Layer tab provides mandatory information to configure the interface.

Figure 3.133: IP Tx setup dialog box (Transport layer)

Label

A name can be given to the channel. It will be used to identify the port for alarms or monitoring. If left empty, the interface will be identified by the IP TX default value.

Activity

The channel can be enabled/disabled. A disabled channel will not send any streams, but its settings will be maintained within the current configuration.

Selected port

Choose which port should be used for streaming. Avoid leaving the Port set to None for an enabled channel.

Destination IP address This field sets the destination IP address for transmitted MPEG frames. Possible values are 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. For unicast transmission, the IP address must be the native port address of the receiver. 8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

364

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

For multicast transmission, IP addresses range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 (however some values are reserved), or, equivalently, 224.0.0.0/4. Address assignments from within this range are specified in the IETF 'best current practice' document also known as RFC 3171. Destination UDP port This parameter enables stream discrimination. Reminder: standard RTP usage is based on 4 contiguous UDP port numbers, this one being the first. You are also recommended to start from port 49152 to avoid conflict with any standard protocol-allocated port numbers. It is a good practice to always use a +6 increment (or +10 for readability). Source IP address

Leave the Source IP address field empty for normal operation. NetProcessor will automatically insert the selected port’s native address in this case. This field can only be used for some redundancy schemes and should be used carefully.

In the Expert parameters area Use ARP

This parameter is normally enabled.

Destination MAC address This entry is ignored when Use ARP is enabled. Other fields (TOS/DiffServ, TTL for MPEG IP datagrams, QoS Tagging, VLAN Id, User Priority) are standard fields that can be changed for fine network usage tuning.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

365

The Adaptation Layer tab provides basic adaptation settings and FEC settings.

Figure 3.134: IP Tx setup dialog box (Adaptation layer)

8566216E(01) September 2010

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

366

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

Basic settings TX Encapsulation

Choice between MPEG/UDP/IP and MPEG/RTP/UDP/IP.

MPEG packets per IP frame Choice from 1 to 7. Important: Parameters governing frame length should not be changed on an enabled IP Tx Channel. The number of packets per frame can be set from 1 to 7, framing can be set either to RTP/UDP or pure UDP. Changing any of these settings during enabled transmission can block all MPEGoIP transmissions. Workaround: Select the frame length before enabling transmission. If blocked, change all IP Tx activity to Off, then reboot NetProcessor and set Tx activity back to On. Null packets discard When enabled, null packets are not transmitted.

NetProcessor 9030 and NetProcessor 9030/40, release 4.0 User Manual

8566216E(01) September 2010

Chapter 3 - Operation 3.4 - Configuration menu

367

FEC settings TX FEC module

FEC on IP TX streams can be enabled/disabled. Two FEC programming modes are available when FEC is enabled: IPLR